Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Specifications
RECEIVED NOV 3 zoo CITY OF TIGARD BUILDING DIVISION Clean\ \ at e Our commitment is clear. Contract Documents for DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS Project 6446 P r r � at m 1 ` p ` 9.0 EXPIRES: 0- N ovember 2010 2c9 zoc OFFICE COPY CLEAN WATER SERVICES CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS Project 6446 November 2010 WEST YOST ASSOCIATES 8100 SW Nyberg Street, Suite 200 Tualatin, OR 97062 CLEAN WATER SERVICES DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS PART 1— BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00030 Advertisement to Bid 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Forms • Bid • Bid Schedule • Bid Certificate • Bid Bond • Non - Collusion Affidavit • Resident/Nonresident Bidder Status Form • First -Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Form PART 2 — CONTRACT FORMS 00500 Agreement 00610 Performance Bond 00620 Payment Bond 00630 Statutory Public Works Bond PART 3 — CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00810 BOLI Prevailing Wage Rate PART 4 — TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01014 Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints 01060 Safety and Health 01300 Submittals 01500 Contractor's Facilities and Utilities 01505 Mobilization and Demobilization 01560 Environmental Controls 01605 Shipment, Protection and Storage 01650 Commissioning and Facility Startup 01700 Restoration of Improvements 01720 Record Drawings 01730 Operation and Maintenance Information November 2010 TOC -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Table of Contents 01999 Reference Forms 01999 -1 Request for Clarification 01999 -2 Submittal Transmittal 01999 -3 Deactivation Request DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK 02050 Demolition and Salvage DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE 03200 Concrete Reinforcing 03301 Cast -in -Place Concrete 03600 Grout DIVISION 4 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 — METALS 05501 Anchor Bolts 05505 Metal Fabrications 05520 Aluminum Handrails DIVISION 6 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 7 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 8 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 9 — FINISHES 09960 High Performance Coatings DIVISION 10 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 11 11088 Aeration Equipment — Fine Bubble Type 11105 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates DIVISION 12 — (NOT USED) DIVISION 13 13400 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 13442 Primary Elements and Transmitters DIVISION 14 — (NOT USED) November 2010 TOC - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Table of Contents DIVISION 15 — PIPES 15060 Pipe and Pipe Fittings: Basic Requirements 15062 Ductile Iron Pipe 15064 Poly -Vinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC) 15066 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 15067 Copper Pipe 15110 Eccentric Plug Valves 15191 Miscellaneous Specialty Valves DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL 16000 General Requirements for Electrical Work 16040 Identification 16110 Raceways 16120 Wire and Cable November 2010 TOC -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Table of Contents (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) • SECTION 00030 CLEAN WATER SERVICES DURHAM ADVANCED WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 6446 ADVERTISEMENT TO BID Sealed Bids will be received by Jane Nishizaki, Administrative Assistant, at the office of Clean Water Services (OWNER), located at the Treatment Plant Services Building, 16060 S.W. 85 Avenue, Tigard, Oregon, 97224 (OWNER's Office), until 2:00 p.m. local time, on November 23, 2010 for the Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 (Project). Any Bids received after the specified time and date will not be considered. No electronic submissions will be accepted. First -Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Forms must be delivered to the same location within two working hours of the Bid closing and in a separate envelope from the Bid. The Bids will be publicly opened and read at 4:00 p.m. local time on November 23, 2010, at OWNER'S Office. The WORK is a Public Works project subject to ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. The WORK includes: Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following work in Aeration Basin 4: modifying the existing concrete baffle wall between cells 4/5; installing a new concrete baffle wall between cells 5/6; removing the gates and filling the channel between cells 4/5 and 7 with concrete; removing the gates and filling the channel north of cell 7 with concrete; Dissolved Oxygen monitoring and control improvements; installing a manually actuated slide gate in the channel at the southeast corner of cell 3; and installing additional aeration diffusers in cell 5. The Project also includes repairs to the water system around Secondary Clarifier No. 3 and Secondary Clarifier No. 4. The site of the WORK is located at the Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility, 16060 SW 85 Avenue, Tigard, Oregon 97224 (Site). The estimated construction cost of the WORK is $175,000. Bidding Documents will be available at the following plan rooms: Oregon Contractor Plan Center McGraw Hill Construction P.O. Box 477 Portland Plan Center 14625 S.E. 82n Drive 5331 SW Macadam Avenue Clackamas, Oregon 97015 Portland, Oregon 97219 Telephone: 503/650 -0148 Telephone: 503/223 -3012 Fax: 503/650 -8273 Fax: 503/223 -3094 Daily Journal of Commerce Builders Exchange of Washington Portland Plan Center 2607 Wetmore Avenue 2840 N.W. 35th Avenue Everett, WA 98201 -2926 Portland, Oregon 97210 -0127 Telephone: 425/258 -1303 Telephone: 503/274 -0624 Fax: 425/259 -3832 Fax: 503/274 -2616 November 2010 00030 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Advertisement to Bid The Bidding Documents may be examined at OWNER'S Office. Contractors may obtain Bidding Documents (which include the technical specifications and accompanying reduced scale drawings) at the OWNER'S Office (contact Jane Nishizaki, telephone 503 -547 -8175, fax 503 -547 -8196, email nishizaki jcleanwaterservices.org) upon payment of $100.00 (non - refundable). The scale of the reduced drawings is one -half of the original scale. Full scale drawings may be purchased at reproduction cost. Contact Ms. Nishizaki for more information regarding document distribution. MANDATORY PRE -BID CONFERENCE AND VISIT TO SITE: Prospective Bidders are required to attend a pre -bid conference and Site visit that will begin at 10:00 a.m. local time on November 9, 2010 in the OWNER's Office. The purpose of the conference and Site visit is to distribute Bidding Documents, discuss the scope of the Project and bidding requirements and to acquaint Bidders with Site conditions. Detailed technical questions may be submitted in writing but they will be answered, if warranted, by written addenda later. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding orlegally effective. To view and obtain Bidding Documents, the plan holders list, Bid results, and for assistance with other administrative issues, contact the OWNER: Clean Water Services Ms. Jane Nishizaki 16060 SW 85 Avenue Tigard, OR 97224 503 -547 -8175 Ph 503 -547 -8196 Fax nishizalcij@cleanwaterservices.org Direct communications on technical issues to the Design Engineer: West Yost Associates, Inc. Greg Humm, PE 8100 Nyberg Street, Suite 200 Tualatin, OR 97062 503- 692 -3223 Ph 503- 692 -3224 Fax e..hummnwestvost.corn Prior to submission of its Bid, Bidder shall be licensed with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board as required by ORS 701.055, and thereafter comply with the requirements of ORS 701.035 to 701.137. Bidders need not be licensed under ORS 468A.720 (regarding licensing of Contractors on projects involving asbestos abatement). Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check or Bid Bond in the amount of 10 percent of the Total Bid Price payable to OWNER as a guarantee that the Bidder, if its Bid is accepted, will promptly execute the Agreement. A Bid shall not be considered unless one of the forms of Bidder's security is enclosed with it. Each Bid must contain a statement as to whether a Bidder is a Resident Bidder as defined by ORS 279A.120. The Bidder shall guarantee the Lump Sum Price for a period of 60 calendar days from the date of Bid opening. Bidders shall be qualified in accordance with the applicable parts of ORS 279C in order to submit a Bid for public work in Oregon. November 2010 00030 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 _ Advertisement to Bid OWNER reserves the right to cancel this solicitation or reject any or all Bids not in compliance with all prescribed public bidding procedures and requirements or when OWNER finds that the Bidder is not responsible as that term is used in any applicable OWNER's Purchasing Rules and ORS 279A.010(1)(r). OWNER may reject for good cause any or all Bids upon a finding by OWNER that it is in the public interest to do so. November 2010 00030 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Advertisement to Bid (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO 6446 PART 1 — DEFINED TERMS 1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders and the Advertisement to Bid which are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Certain additional terms used in the Bidding Documents have the meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. A. Bidder - -One who submits a Bid directly to OWNER, as distinct from a sub - bidder, who submits a price or quote to a Bidder. B. Successful Bidder -- Lowest, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on the basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. PART 2 — COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.01 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids. Neither OWNER nor ENGINEER assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.02 Full size Drawings may be obtained from ENGINEER at cost of reproduction and handling, plus postage for mailing (if mailing is requested). Drawings will only be made available to firms on the Bidding Document Holders List having complete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.03 Bidding Documents made available on the above terms are only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the WORK and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. PART 3 — QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS 3.01 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the WORK, the apparent Successful Bidder and other Bidders as determined by the OWNER, must be prepared to submit within 7 days after OWNER's written request, evidence such as financial data, previous experience, present commitments, and other such data as may be called for in the Bidding Documents. 3.02 Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to Contract award. 3.03 Bidders for public work in Oregon shall be qualified in conformance with ORS Chapter 279C. 3.04 Nothing indicated herein will prejudice OWNER's right to seek additional pertinent information as is provided in Article 14 — Evaluation of Bids of this Section. November 2010 00100 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders 3.05 Bidders and every subcontractor performing WORK on the Project must have filed with the Construction Contractors Board a public works bond in the amount of $30,000 with a corporate surety authorized to do business in the State of Oregon before starting WORK on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8), or (9). PART 4 — LICENSING REQUIREMENTS 4.01 A person, partnership, corporation, or joint venture shall have a current, valid license issued by the Oregon Construction Contractors Board, as required by ORS 701.055, prior to submitting a Bid to do WORK as a contractor or subcontractor. PART 5 — ENVIRONMENTAL AND NATURAL RESOURCES LAWS AND REGULATIONS 5.01 Bidder's attention is directed to the General Requirements and Supplementary Conditions for ordinances and regulations dealing with the prevention of pollution and preservation of natural resources which may affect the performance of the WORK. Bidder shall take such ordinances and regulations into consideration in preparation and submission of its Bid. PART 6 — INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 6.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to the ENGINEER. Questions shall be submitted in writing only (i.e., mail, fax or e- mail). Additions, deletions, or revisions to the Bidding Documents considered necessary by the ENGINEER in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than 10 days prior to the date of Bids may not be answered. Only answers to such questions issued by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 6.02 Addenda may also be issued to make other additions, deletions, or revisions to the Bidding Documents. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda on the Bid Form in the appropriate space. 6.03 Bidders shall make no special interpretation or inference of intent from differing formats in the Technical Specifications. PART 7 — BIDDER'S EXANIINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE 7.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid: A. To examine thoroughly the Bidding Documents and other related data identified in the Bidding Documents; B. To visit the Site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the WORK; C. To consider federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, or performance of the WORK; November 2010 00100 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders • • D. To study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Bidding Documents; and E. To promptly notify the ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in or between the Bidding Documents and such other related data. 7.02 Copies of reports and drawings utilized by the ENGINEER in the preparation of the Bidding Documents will be made available by OWNER to any Bidder on request at cost of reproduction and handling, plus postage for mailing (if mailing is requested), if the reports and drawings are not bound herein. Those reports and drawings are not part of the Bidding Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which the Bidder is entitled to reasonably rely, as provided in Paragraph SC -4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions, are incorporated herein by reference. 7.03 Information and data reflected in the Bidding Documents with respect to underground facilities at or contiguous to the Site are based upon information and data furnished to OWNER and ENGINEER by the owners of such underground facilities or others, and OWNER does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplementary Conditions. 7.04 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, underground facilities, and other physical conditions, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing conditions appear in Paragraphs 4.02 through 4.04 of the General Conditions. 7.05 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder will, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface, and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the Site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the WORK and which the Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing the WORK in accordance with the time, price, and other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 7.06 On request a minimum of two (2) days in advance, OWNER will provide each Bidder access to the Site to conduct such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Location of any excavation or boring shall be subject to prior approval of OWNER and applicable agencies. Bidder shall fill all holes, restore all pavement to match existing structural section, and shall clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. 7.07 The lands upon which the WORK is to be performed, rights -of -way, and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the CONTRACTOR in performing the WORK are identified in the Bidding Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the CONTRACTOR Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by OWNER unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. November 2010 00100 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders • • 7.08 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Paragraph 7 and the following: A. The Bid is premised upon performing the WORK required by the Bidding Documents without exception and such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (if any) as may be required by the Bidding Documents; B. Bidder has given the ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, and discrepancies in the Bidding Documents and the written resolution thereof by the ENGINEER is acceptable to the Bidder; and C. The Bidding Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the WORK. PART 8 — SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS 8.01 ORS 279C.370 requires Bidders for Public Improvement Projects exceeding $100,000 to submit a disclosure form identifying first tier Subcontractors that will furnish labor or labor and materials equal to 5 percent of the total Contract Price, but at least $15,000; or $350,000, regardless of percentage of the total Contract Price. If no Subcontractors are subject to the disclosure requirements, "NONE" shall be indicated on the form to be provided. Subcontractor disclosure forms not submitted with the Bid shall be submitted within two (2) working hours of Bid closing. If Bidder fails to submit a disclosure form with the information required and by the stated deadline, the Bid will be rejected. 8.02 The definition of a Subcontractor does not include Suppliers who provide materials only. 8.03 If the Successful Bidder declines to make a substitution of a Subcontractor, Supplier, person, or organization acceptable to OWNER, as required by Paragraph 6.06.B of the General Conditions, OWNER may award the Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person, or organization listed and to whom OWNER or ENGINEER does not make written objection prior to giving the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in General Conditions Paragraph 6.06.B. November 2010 00100 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders S • • • PART 9 — WAGE RATES • • 9.01 The WORK under these Bidding Documents is to be paid for by public funds. This is a • public works project subject to the state prevailing rates of wage under ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. Unless otherwise exempt, prevailing wage rates must be paid by Contractor and any Subcontractor on the Project in accordance with ORS • 279C.838, ORS 279C.840, or the Davis -Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. Section 3141 et seq.). • The applicable Oregon minimum prevailing wage rates for such workers are contained in the publication July 1, 2010 Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon dated July 1, 2010, as amended by the October 1, 2010 Amendment (see links at • http: / /www. oregon.gov/boli/whd/pwr/pwrstate. shtml), available at • http: / /www.oregon.gov/BOLI and are hereby incorporated herein as of the date these Bidding Documents were first advertised. • • 9.02 ORS 279C.365(1)(g) requires that all Bids for public work, including those public work • projects financed by federal funds and subject to the Davis Bacon Act, shall include a statement by the Bidder that it will comply with the provisions of ORS 279C.838, • 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. The Bid Form in the Bidding Documents • contains the required statement of Bidder's declaration of compliance with ORS • 279C.838, 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. The Bidder's signing of the Bid constitutes compliance with this Oregon Statute. S • 9.03 OWNER shall be responsible for paying the fee required by ORS 279C.825(1) to the • Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries. • PART 10 — BID FORM 10.01 The Bid shall be submitted on the Bid Form provided herein. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed by typing or printing in ink. All price information shall be shown in both words and figures where required. All names must be printed below the signatures. The Bid shall be submitted in a sealed envelope that shall be plainly marked in the upper left hand corner with the name and address of the Bidder and shall bear the words "BID FOR" followed by the title of the Bidding Documents for the WORK, the name of the OWNER, the address where Bids are to be delivered or mailed to, and the date and hour of opening of Bids. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 10.02 First -Tier Subcontractor Disclosure Forms must be delivered to the same location for delivery of the Bids within two hours of the specified time for receipt of Bids. 10.03 Bidder's state Contractor license number for the State of Oregon shall be shown on the Bid Form. 10.04 Each Bid must identify whether the Bidder is a resident bidder, as defined by ORS 279A.120, by completing and submitting the Resident/Nonresident Bidder Status Form. 10.05 Bidder shall complete the Noncollusion Affidavit and submit it with its Bid. November 2010 00100 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders • • • PART 11— BID CERTIFICATES • 11.01 Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president, a vice - president, or other corporate officer. The Bid shall be accompanied by the enclosed • Certificate of Authority to sign, and shall be attested by the secretary or assistant • secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must appear below the si • • 11.02 Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and be signed by a managing partner, accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, and his/her title must appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership must appear below the signature. • 11.03 Bids by joint ventures must be executed in the joint venture name and be signed by a joint • venture managing partner, accompanied by the enclosed Certificate of Authority to sign, • and his/her title must appear under the signature and the official address of the joint • venture must appear below the signature. • PART 12 — DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS • 12.01 More than one Bid from an individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or association under • the same or different names will not be considered. If the OWNER believes that any Bidder is interested in more than one Bid for the WORK contemplated, all Bids in which such Bidder is interested will be rejected. If the OWNER believes that collusion exists among the Bidders, all Bids will be rejected. A party who has quoted prices to a Bidder is not hereby disqualified from quoting prices to other Bidders, or from submitting a Bid directly for the WORK. PART 13 — QUANTITIES OF WORK (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 14 — EVALUATION OF BIDS 14.01 OWNER will evaluate Bids to determine which responsible Bidder has made the lowest responsive Bid. OWNER will make this evaluation in accordance with the Bidding Documents and applicable law. OWNER may reject a Bid when it is the public interest to do so, or when OWNER finds the Bidder is not responsible, as that term is used in any applicable OWNER's Purchasing Rules and ORS 279A.010(1)(r). OWNER may also reject Bids from Bidders declared ineligible under ORS 279C.860 or from Bidders listed as not qualified by the State of Oregon Construction Contractors Board, from Bidders that have not met the requirements of ORS 279A.105(1), (2) or (3), and for other circumstances that indicate acceptance of the Bid may impair the integrity of the selection process. November 2010 00100 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders 14.02 OWNER reserves its right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the right to reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids, and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the public interest to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. OWNER reserves the right to reject all Bids and rebid the Project if it is in the public interest to do so in accordance with ORS 279C.395. OWNER also reserves the right to waive all informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the WORK. 14.03 In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. OWNER shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. 14.04 OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the WORK for which the identity was required. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data, and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the WORK when such data are required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 14.05 OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in Bid evaluation and to establish responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations to execute WORK in accordance with the Bidding Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 14.06 In determining the lowest responsible Bidder, OWNER will for the purpose of awarding the Contract, add a percent increase on the Bid of a nonresident Bidder equal to the percent, if any, of the preference given to that Bidder in the state in which the Bidder resides. 14.07 If, at the time this Contract is to be awarded, the total of the lowest acceptable Bid exceeds the funds then estimated by OWNER as available, OWNER may reject all Bids or take such other action as best serves OWNER's interests. 14.08 In the event of failure of the Successful Bidder to sign the Agreement and provide acceptable Performance and Payment Bond(s), insurance certificate(s), and other required documents, OWNER may award the Contract to the next lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. PART 15 — SUBMISSION OF BIDS • 15.01 The Bid shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Advertisement To • Bid. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that its Bid is received in proper time and at the proper place. • • November 2010 00100 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders PART 16 — BID SECURITY, BONDS, AND INSURANCE 16.01 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier's check or approved Bid Bond in an amount equal to ten percent of the Bid. The check or bond shall be made payable to OWNER and shall be given as a guarantee that the Bidder, if awarded the WORK, will enter into an Agreement with OWNER, and will furnish the necessary insurance certificates, Payment Bond, and Performance Bond, each of the bonds to be in the amount stated in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and copies of Public Works Bonds. In case of refusal or failure to enter into the Agreement, the check or Bid Bond, as the case may be, shall be forfeited to OWNER. If the Bidder elects to furnish a Bid Bond as its Bid security, the Bidder shall use the Bid Bond form bound herein, or one conforming substantially to it in form. Bid Bonds shall comply with the requirements applicable to payment and performance bonds in the General Conditions. PART 17 — DISCREPANCIES IN BIDS 17.01 In the event there is more than one Bid item in a Bid Schedule, the Bidder shall furnish a price for all Bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so will render the Bid non- responsive and may cause its rejection. In the event there are unit price Bid items in a Bidding Schedule and the amount indicated for a unit price Bid item does not equal the product of the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall govern and the amount will be corrected accordingly, and the BIDDER shall be bound by the correction. In the event there is more than one Bid item in a Bid Schedule and the total indicated for the Schedule does not agree with the sum of the prices bid on the individual items, the prices bid on the individual items shall govern and the total for the Schedule will be corrected accordingly, and the Bidder shall be bound by the correction. In the case of discrepancies between figures and written words, words shall govern. PART 18 — MODIFICATIONS AND UNAUTHORIZED ALTERNATIVE BIDS 18.01 Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisos attached to the Bid shall render it informal and may cause its rejection as being non - responsive. The Bid Form shall be completed without interlineations, alterations, or erasures in the printed text. Alternative Bids will not be considered unless called for. Oral, telegraphic, telephonic or electronic Bids or modifications will not be considered. PART 19 — WITHDRAWAL OF BID 19.01 The Bid may be withdrawn by the Bidder by means of a written request, signed by the Bidder or its properly authorized representative. Such written request must be delivered to the place stipulated in the Advertisement To Bid for receipt of Bids prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids. November 2010 00100 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders 19.02 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed, written notice with OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake' in the preparation of its Bid, as determined by Oregon law and any applicable OWNER's Purchasing Rules, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further consideration on the WORK to be provided under the Contract Documents. PART 20 — AWARD OF CONTRACT 20.01 Award of the Contract, if awarded, will be made to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder whose Bid complies with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Unless otherwise specified, any such award will be made within the period stated in the Advertisement To Bid that the Bids are to remain open. Unless otherwise indicated, a single award will be made for all the Bid items in an individual Bid Schedule. In the event the WORK is contained in more than one Bid Schedule, OWNER will award all Schedules. PART 21 RETURN OF BID SECURITY 21.01 Within 14 days after award of the Contract, OWNER will return the Bid securities accompanying such Bids that are not being considered in making the award. All other Bid securities will be held until the Agreement has been finally executed. They will then be returned to the respective Bidders whose Bids they accompany. PART 22 — EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT 22.01 The Bidder to whom award is made shall execute a written Agreement with the OWNER on the form of Agreement provided, shall secure all insurance, and shall furnish all certificates and bonds required by the Bidding Documents within 10 calendar days after receipt of the Notice of Award from OWNER. Failure or refusal to enter into an Agreement as herein provided or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid security. If the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, OWNER may award the Contract to the second lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. If the second lowest responsive, responsible Bidder refuses or fails to execute the Agreement, OWNER may award the Contract to the third lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or third lowest Bidder to execute the Agreement, each such Bidder's Bid securities shall be likewise forfeited to OWNER. 22.02 Within 10 Calendar days of OWNER receiving the properly executed Agreements and acceptable certificates and bonds, OWNER will provide one fully executed Agreement to CONTRACTOR. PART 23 — LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 23.01 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. S • November 2010 00100 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders • PART 24 — RETAINAGE 24.01 Provisions concerning retainage and CONTRACTOR's rights to deposit securities in lieu of retainage are set forth in the Agreement. PART 25 — PROTEST PROCEDURE 25.01 OWNER has adopted its own Public Contracting Rules and is not subject to the Attorney General's Model Public Contracting Rules. OWNER'S procurement rules have opportunities for Bidders to protest at various stages in the procurement process. This section only contains a brief summary of the deadlines for filing protests. It does not identify the conditions required to file a protest or the information required to be included in the protest. Copies of OWNER'S rules containing the protest process may be obtained by contacting OWNER's representative. A. Specification Protest Process 1. A Bidder must deliver a protest of specifications to OWNER in writing no later than ten (10) calendar days prior to the due date for Bids. B. Solicitation Protest 1. Under OWNER's rules, prospective Bidders have the opportunity to protest the procurement process or this Invitation to Bid by submitting a written protest to OWNER not less than ten (10) days prior to the due date for Bids. C. Award Protest 1. Adversely affected Bidders will also have an opportunity to protest OWNER's Notice of Intent to Award, but a written protest must be delivered to OWNER within seven (7) days after issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award. The award by OWNER's Board of Directors of the Contract shall constitute a final decision of the OWNER to award the Contract if no written protest of the award is filed. END OF SECTION November 2010 00100 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Instructions to Bidders SECTION 00300 BID FORMS BID BID TO: Clean Water Services 1. The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents to perform the WORK as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents entitled Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446. 2. Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents and Contract Documents, including without limitation those in the Advertisement to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, dealing with the disposition of the Bid security. 3. This Bid will remain open for sixty (60) days unless otherwise required by law. Bidder will enter into an Agreement within the time and in the manner required in the Advertisement to Bid and the Instructions to Bidders, and will furnish the insurance certificates, Payment Bond, Performance Bond and copies of Public Works Bonds required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bidder agrees that as CONTRACTOR, it will comply with ORS 279C.838, 279C.840 or 40 U.S.C. Section 3141, et seq. 5. Bidder certifies that Bidder has not discriminated and will not discriminate, in violation of ORS 279A.110(1) against any minority, women or emerging small business enterprises certified under ORS 200.055, or against a business enterprise that is owned or controlled by or that employs a disabled veteran, as defined in ORS 408.225, in obtaining any required subcontracts. 6. Bidder certifies that it has in place or will implement before performance of the Work for this Project begins a mandatory employee drug- testing program. Bidder further certifies that it will demonstrate that the employee drug - testing program is in place. 7. Bidder has examined copies of all the Contract Documents including the following addenda (receipt of all of which is hereby acknowledged): Number Date • November 2010 00300 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms Failure to acknowledge receipt of Addenda may render the Bid not responsive and may be cause for its rejection. 8. Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, WORK, Site, locality where the WORK is to be performed, the legal requirements (federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations), and the conditions affecting cost, progress or performance of the WORK and has made such independent investigations as Bidder deems necessary. To all the foregoing, and including all Bid Forms contained in this Bid, the Bidder further agrees to complete the WORK required under the Contract Documents within the Contract Time stipulated in the Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefore the Contract Price based on the Lump Sum Price named in the Bid Forms. Dated: Bidder: By: Name (Signature) Name (Type or Print) Title: November 2010 00300 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms BID SCHEDULE Schedule of Bid Prices for Construction of Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 Bidder agrees to accept as full payment for the Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 proposed within the Bidding Documents, based upon the undersigned's own estimate of quantities and costs and including sales, consumer, use, and other taxes, except as provided below, and overhead and profit, the following bid amount of: Bid Item Lump Sum Price Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements $ (figures) (words) (The amount in words shall take precedence.) November 2010 00300 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms BID CERTIFICATE (if Corporation) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERIik Y that a meeting of the Board of Directors of the a corporation existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2010, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of this Corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated , 2010 to Clean Water Services by this Corporation and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of this Corporation shall be the official act and deed of this Corporation." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2010. (Signature) (Title) Secretary (Address) November 2010 00300 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms BID CERTIFICATE (if Partnership) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Partners of the a partnership existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2010, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Partnership, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated , 2010 to Clean Water Services by this Partnership and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the General Partner shall be the official act and deed of this Partnership." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2010. (Signature) (Title) (Address) November 2010 00300 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms BID CERTIFICATE (if Joint Venture) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Principals of the a joint venture existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 2010, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Joint Venture, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Bid dated , 2010 to Clean Water Services by this Joint Venture and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the shall be the official act and deed of this Joint Venture." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this day of 2010. Managing Partner (Address) November 2010 00300 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms BID BOND FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, That as Principal, and as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of dollars, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a Bid to OWNER to perform the WORK required under the Bid Forms of the OWNER's Contract Documents entitled Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446. NOW THEREFORE, if the Principal is awarded a contract by OWNER and, within the time and in the manner required in the "Advertisement To Bid" and the "Instructions To Bidders" enters into a written Agreement on the form of agreement bound with the Contract Documents, furnishes the required certificates of insurance, and furnishes the required Performance Bond and Payment Bond and copies of Public Works Bonds, and performs in all other respects the Agreement created by this Bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The Surety stipulates and agrees that the obligation of the Surety shall in no way be impaired or affected by an extension of the time within which OWNER may accept such Bid and the Surety further waives notice of any such extension. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by OWNER and OWNER prevails, the Principal and the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by OWNER in such suit, including reasonable attorney's fees and costs to be fixed by the court. SIGNED, this day of , 2010. (Principal) (Surety) By: By: (Signature) (Signature) (NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF SURETY) November 2010 00300 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 State of ) Services Requested ) ss. In Bid: Durham Aeration County of ) Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements Project No. 6446 I state that I am (Title) of (Name of Firm), and being first duly sworn, depose and say that I am authorized to make this Affidavit on behalf of this firm and its owners, directors, and officers. I state that: (1) The price(s) and amount of this Bid have been arrived at independently and without consultation, communication or agreement with any other contractor, Bidder or potential Bidder, except as disclosed on the attached appendix; (2) Neither the price(s), amount of the Bid or approximate prices or amounts, nor other information included in this Bid have been disclosed to any other firm or person who is a Bidder or potential Bidder, and that they will not be disclosed prior to the award of the Contract(s); (3) No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain from submitting a Bid, or to submit a Bid containing less competitive terms than those contained in this Bid; (4) The Bid of this firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or discussion with, or inducement from, any firm or person to submit a complementary or other noncompetitive proposal; and (5) (Name of this Firm), its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directors and employees are not currently under investigation by any governmental agency and have not in the last four years been convicted of or found liable for any act prohibited by State or Federal law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to proposing on any public contract, except as described on the attached appendix. November 2010 00300 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms I state that (Name of this Firm) understands and acknowledges that the above representations are material and important, and will be relied on by Clean Water Services in awarding the Contract(s) for which this Bid is submitted. I understand and this firm understands that any misstatement in this Affidavit is and shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from Clean Water Services of the true facts relating to the submission of Bids for this Contract. Name of Company Signature/Position Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 2010, by Notary Public for This Commission Expires: November 2010 00300 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms RESIDENT/NONRESIDENT BIDDER STATUS FORM FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 Oregon law (ORS 279A.120) requires OWNER, in determining the lowest responsible bidder, to add a percent increase on the bid of a nonresident bidder equal to the percent, if any, of the preference given to bidders in the state in which that bidder resides. Consequently, each bidder must indicate whether it is a resident or nonresident bidder. A resident bidder is a bidder who has paid unemployment taxes or income taxes in Oregon during the 12 calendar months immediately preceding submission of this bid, and has a business address in Oregon, and has stated in its bid whether the bidder is a "resident bidder." A "nonresident bidder" is a bidder who is not a resident bidder. The undersigned bidder states that it is: (check one) 1. A resident bidder 2. A nonresident bidder Indicate state in which bidder resides: CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR'S LICENSING Oregon law requires all contractors to be licensed with the Oregon Construction Contractors Board or for landscaping projects with the Landscape Contractors Board in order to submit a Bid to do work and to do work as a contractor or a landscape contractor, respectively. The undersigned Bidder states it is now licensed by the Oregon Construction Contractors Board. Indicate Bidder's Construction Contractors or Landscape Contractors Board License No. _ Signature of Bidder November 2010 00300 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms FIRST -TIER SUBCONTRACTOR DISCLOSURE FORM FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 Bid Closing: Disclosure Submittal Deadline: This form must be submitted at the location specified in the Advertisement To Bid on the advertised bid closing date and within two working hours after the advertised bid closing time. List below the names of each subcontractor that will be furnishing labor or furnishing labor and materials and that is required to be disclosed, the category of work that the subcontractor will be performing and the dollar value of the subcontract. Enter `NONE' if there are no subcontractors that need to be disclosed (ATTACH ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NEEDED). Subcontractor Name Dollar Value Category of Work Failure to submit this form by the disclosure deadline will result in a nonresponsive bid. A nonresponsive bid will not be considered for award. Form Submitted by (Bidder Name): Contact Name: Phone No.: SIGNATURE: By: Title: Date: END OF SECTION November 2010 00300 -11 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Bid Forms (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of , 2010 by and between Clean Water Services (OWNER) and to be determined (CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK. CONTRACTOR shall complete the WORK as specified or indicated in OWNER's Contract Documents entitled Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 (Project). The WORK under this Contract shall consist of, but is not limited to, the following: Furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following work in Aeration Basin 4: modifying the existing concrete baffle wall between cells 4/5; installing a new concrete baffle wall between cells 5/6; removing the gates and filling the channel between cells 4/5 and 7 with concrete; removing the gates and filling the channel north of cell 7 with concrete; Dissolved Oxygen monitoring and control improvements; installing a manually actuated slide gate in the channel at the southeast corner of cell 3; and installing additional aeration diffusers in cell 5. The Project also includes repairs to the water system around Secondary Clarifier No. 3 and Secondary Clarifier No. 4. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by West Yost Associates Inc., 8100 SW Nyberg Road, Suite 200, Tualatin, OR 97062, (503) 692 -3223 and they are the Design Engineer -of- Record. For the purposes of this Agreement OWNER shall also be referred to as ENGINEER and shall have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES. Milestone, Substantial Completion and Final Completion WORK shall be completed within the number of days from the commencement dates identified below: Milestone Commencement Date Calendar Days WORK requiring channels and Cells 1 -7 of Work shall not proceed on 45 Aeration Basin 4 to be out of service this Item until March 1, 2011 Substantial Completion Date of Notice to Proceed 145 (NTP) Final Completion Date of Notice to Proceed 160 (NTP) November 2010 00500 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Agreement ARTICLE 4. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the WORK is not completed within the time(s) specified in Article 3 herein, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in determining in a legal or other dispute resolution proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the WORK is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the following amounts for each day that expires after the time specified in Article 3 herein: Milestone Liquidated Damages per Day Aeration Basin 4 Work $600 Substantial Completion $200 Final Completion $200 In addition, CONTRACTOR shall pay damages of impacts to other contractors /suppliers affected by CONTRACTOR delays. OWNER shall recover such liquidated damages by deducting the amount owed by change order or from the final payment or any retainage held by OWNER. Each Milestone is a separate Contract requirement. OWNER will not assess liquidated damage amounts cumulatively for failure to meet multiple Milestone dates. ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT PRICE. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds the amount(s) set forth in the conformed Bid Forms, which are included as an attachment to this Agreement. ARTICLE 6. PAYMENT PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 7. RETAINAGE. Prior to Final Completion, OWNER shall retain from progress payments 5 percent of the value of WORK completed. In lieu of retainage, and at CONTRACTOR's option, provisions may be made as provided in ORS 279C.560 for either depositing with OWNER or in a bank or trust company, bonds or securities of value equal to the retainage, to be held for the benefit of OWNER. Interest on such bonds or securities shall accrue to CONTRACTOR. Costs incurred by OWNER as a result of this option will be deducted from CONTRACTOR's final payment. November 2010 00500 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Agreement In lieu of retainage, CONTRACTOR may elect to have accumulated funds deposited by OWNER, as provided in ORS 279C.560, in an interest - bearing account. Interest on such an account would accrue to CONTRACTOR Costs incurred by OWNER as a result of this option will be deducted from CONTRACTOR's final payment. In lieu of retainage CONTRACTOR, with the approval of OWNER, may deposit a surety bond for all or any portion of the retainage in a form acceptable to OWNER Such bond and any proceeds therefrom shall be made subject to all claims and liens as provided for in ORS 279C.550 to 279C.620. ARTICLE 8. PREVAILING WAGE RATES /BOLI FEE/PUBLIC WORKS BOND REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR agrees that the provisions required by ORS 279C.830 pertaining to CONTRACTOR's payment of prevailing wage rates shall be included as part of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay workers at not less than the specific minimum hourly rate of wages in accordance with ORS 279C.838 and 279C.840 and shall require its subcontractors to pay at such rates. The applicable Oregon prevailing wage rates for such workers are incorporated by reference in Section 00810. Contractor shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to comply with this provision. OWNER shall pay the required fee to the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries pursuant to the provisions of ORS 279C.825. Before starting any Work on the Project, CONTRACTOR shall have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). CONTRACTOR shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). ARTICLE 9. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning WORK are: • Agreement • Permits from outside agencies • Addenda numbers to . inclusive • Conformed Bid Forms • Contract Specifications: Volume 1, Divisions 00 through 16 (Except Sections 00030 — Advertisement to Bid, and Section 00100 — Instructions to Bidders) • Contract Drawings • Executed Performance and Payment Bonds • Copies of Public Works Bonds from CONTRACTOR and every subcontractor on the Project. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed in this Article 9. The Contract Documents may only be amended by Change Order as provided in Article 10 of the General Conditions. November 2010 00500 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Agreement ARTICLE 10. ASSIGNMENT. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation monies that may become due and monies that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 11. PAYROLL AND CERTIFIED STATEMENT FILING REQUIREMENTS AND ADDITIONAL RETAINAGE. CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR'S surety, and every subcontractor or subcontractor's surety, shall file with OWNER written payroll and certified statements (Certified Payrolls) that accurately and completely contain the payroll records for each week during which the CONTRACTOR or subcontractor employs a worker on a public works project. The Certified Payrolls shall contain the information required and conform to the requirements set forth in ORS 279C.845 and Oregon Administrative Rule 839 - 025 -0010. CONTRACTOR shall file the Certified Payrolls with OWNER once a month by the fifth business day of the following month. OWNER shall retain 25 percent of any amount earned by CONTRACTOR, in addition to other retainage, on the WORK until CONTRACTOR has filed with OWNER the required Certified Payrolls. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR the amount retained under this section within 14 days after the CONTRACTOR files the Certified Payrolls required by this article regardless of whether a subcontractor has failed to file Certified Payrolls. OWNER is not required to verify the truth of the contents of the Certified Payrolls filed by CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR shall retain 25 percent of any amount earned by a first -tier subcontractor on the WORK until die subcontractor has filed with OWNER the required Certified Payrolls. CONTRACTOR shall verify that the first -tier subcontractor has filed the Certified Payrolls before the CONTRACTOR may pay the subcontractor any amount retained under this article. CONTRACTOR shall pay the first -tier subcontractor the amount retained under this article within 14 days after the subcontractor files the Certified Payrolls required by this article. Neither OWNER nor CONTRACTOR is required to verify the truth of the contents of the Certified Payrolls filed by the first -tier subcontractor. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. November 2010 00500 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Agreement IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first above written. CLEAN WATER SERVICES CONTRACTOR By: By: General Manager or Designee Title: Address for giving notices Address for giving notices Approved as to Form License No. District Legal Counsel November 2010 00500 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Agreement AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Corporation) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY ERTIFY C that a meeting of the Board of Directors of the a corporation existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 20 , and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as (insert title) of the Corporation, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 by and between this Corporation and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the Secretary of the Corporation, shall be the official act and deed of this Corporation." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF. I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2010. President Secretary November 2010 00500 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Agreement AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Partnership) STATE OF ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Partners of the a partnership existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 20 , and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Partnership, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 by and between this Partnership and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the shall be the official act and deed of this Partnership." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this , day of 2010. Partner November 2010 00500 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Agreement AGREEMENT CERTIFICATE (if Joint Venture) STATE OF ) ) SS: COUNTY OF ) I HEREBY CERTIFY that a meeting of the Principals of the a joint venture existing under the laws of the State of , was held on , 20, and the following resolution was duly passed and adopted: "RESOLVED, that , as of the Joint Venture, be and is hereby authorized to execute the Agreement for Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements Project No. 6446 by and between this Joint Venture and Clean Water Services and that his/her execution thereof, attested by the shall be the official act and deed of this Joint Venture." I further certify that the resolution is now in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF. I have hereunto set my hand this . day of 2010. Managing Partner END OF AGREEMENT November 2010 00500 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Agreement SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT NO. 6446 Bond No. Amount: $ KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, that • as Contractor, and a corporation, duly authorized to do a general surety business in the State of Oregon, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter referred to as the Obligee, in the sum of DOLLARS ($ ) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, and firmly by these presents. This bond is executed under the authority of ORS Chapters 279A, 279B and 279C, of the State of Oregon, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated into this bond and made a part thereof. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION 1S SUCH THAT: WHEREAS, the Contractor has been conditionally awarded a contract for Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 by the Obligee, which contract, including all Contract Documents, is by this reference expressly incorporated herein. NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this bond is such that if the Contractor shall faithfully perform all the provisions of such Contract for the duration thereof, including the one -year correction period described in Contract Documents, and indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from any claim for damages of every kind and description or injury to property or persons arising or alleged to have arisen by reason of the work; and shall, in the time and manner, and under the terms and conditions prescribed, faithfully do, perform, and furnish all matters and things as by them in the Contract undertaken, and as by law, local, state, and federal, prescribed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER: In no event shall the Surety be liable for a greater sum than the amount of this bond. The Surety for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the term of the Contract Documents, or to the work to be performed thereunder, November 2010 00610 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Performance Bond or the Specifications accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work, or to the Contract Documents. Signed this day of , 2010. ADDRESS CONTRACTOR PHONE NUMBER SURETY By: Attorney -in -Fact Address of Surety's Resident Agent Approved as to Form District Counsel November 2010 00610 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Performance Bond SECTION 00620 PAYMENT BOND FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 Bond No. Amount: $ KNOW ALL PEOPLE BY THESE PRESENTS, that as Contractor, and a corporation, duly authorized to do a general surety business in the State of Oregon, as Surety, are jointly and severally held and bound unto Clean Water Services, hereinafter referred to as the Obligee, in the sum of DOLLARS ($ ) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, and firmly by these presents. This bond is executed under the authority of ORS Chapters 279A, 279B and 279C, of the State of Oregon, the provisions of which are hereby incorporated into this bond and made a part thereof. • THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT: WHEREAS, the Contractor has been conditionally awarded a contract for Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements, Project No. 6446 by the Obligee, which contract, including all Contract Documents, is by this reference expressly incorporated herein. NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this bond is such that if the Contractor shall faithfully and promptly pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, materialmen, and all persons who supply such work and services, and indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from any claim for damages of every kind and description or injury to property or persons arising or alleged to have arisen by reason of the work; and shall, in the time and manner, and under the terms and conditions prescribed, faithfully do, perform, and furnish all matters and things as by them in the Contract undertaken, and as by law, local, state, and federal, prescribed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER: In no event shall the Surety be liable for a greater sum than the amount of this bond. The Surety for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the term of the Contract Documents, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the Specifications accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work, or to the Contract Documents. November 2010 00620 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Payment Bond Signed this day of , 2010. ADDRESS CONTRACTOR PHONE NUMBER SURETY By: Attorney -in -Fact Address of Surety's Resident Agent Approved as to Form District Counsel November 2010 00620 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Payment Bond SECTION 00630 STATUTORY PUBLIC WORKS BOND Contractor shall file the attached Statutory Public Works Bond with the Construction Contractor's Board. November 2010 00630 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Statutory Public Works Bond (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the controlling Laws and Regulations. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Prepared by ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS CONIlVIITTEE and Issued and Published Jointly by (�l� U . � 6VIFp AEC " cs i, ti A,m [CAN Ox{_NCII, fil' h:SGI,NFLRINS: CA»tRtNIO. � f ASE American Society National Society of Professional Engineers of Civil Engineers -- __. Professional Engineers in Private Practice AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE .4 Practice Division of the NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS Endorsed by CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS INSTITUTE EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (EJCDC C -520 or C -525, 2007 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the Narrative Guide to the EJCDC Construction Documents (EJCDC C -001, 2007 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (EJCDC C -800, 2007 Edition). • Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314 -2794 (703) 684 -2882 www.nspe.org American Council of Engineering Companies 1015 15th Street N.W., Washington, DC 20005 (202) 347-7474 www. acec. orQ American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191 -4400 (800) 548 -2723 www.asce.org Associated General Contractors of America 2300 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201 -3308 (703) 548 -3118 www.agc.org The copyright for this EJCDC document is owned jointly by the four EJCDC sponsoring organizations and held in trust for their benefit by NSPE. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright CO 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1 — Definitions and Terminology 1 1.01 Defined Terms 1 1.02 Terminology 5 • Article 2 — Preliminary Matters 6 2.01 Delivery Bonds and Evidence of Insurance 6 2.02 Copies of Documents 6 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed 6 2.04 Starting the Work 7 2.05 Before Starting Construction 7 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives 7 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules 7 Article 3 — Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse 8 3.01 Intent 8 3.02 Reference Standards 8 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies 8 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents 9 3.05 Reuse of Documents 10 3.06 Electronic Data 10 • Article 4 — Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points 10 4.01 Availability of Lands 10 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions 11 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions 11 4.04 Underground Facilities 13 4.05 Reference Points 14 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site 14 Article 5 — Bonds and Insurance 16 • 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds 16 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers 16 5.03 Certificates of Insurance 16 5.04 Contractor's Insurance 17 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance 18 5.06 Property Insurance 18 5.07 Waiver of Rights 20 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds 21 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page i 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace 21 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer 21 Article 6 - Contractor's Responsibilities 22 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence 22 6.02 Labor; Working Hours 22 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment 22 6.04 Progress Schedule 23 6.05 Substitutes and "Or- Equals" 23 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others 25 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties 27 6.08 Permits 27 6.09 Laws and Regulations 27 6.10 Taxes 28 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas 28 6.12 Record Documents 29 6.13 Safety and Protection 29 6.14 Safety Representative 30 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs 30 6.16 Emergencies 30 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples 30 6.18 Continuing the Work 32 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee 32 6.20 Indemnification 33 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services 34 Article 7 - Other Work at the Site 35 7.01 Related Work at Site 35 7.02 Coordination 35 7.03 Legal Relationships 36 Article 8 - Owner's Responsibilities 36 8.01 Communications to Contractor 36 8.02 Replacement of Engineer 36 • 8.03 Furnish Data 36 8.04 Pay When Due 36 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests 36 8.06 Insurance 36 8.07 Change Orders 36 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals 37 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities 37 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition 37 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements 37 • 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program 37 (, Article 9 - Engineer's Status During Construction 37 9.01 Owner's Representative 37 0 9.02 Visits to Site 37 0 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright C.' 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page ii 0 0 9.03 Project Representative 38 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work 38 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work 38 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments 38 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work 39 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work 39 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities 39 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program 40 Article 10 - Changes in the Work; Claims 40 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work 40 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work 40 10.03 Execution of Change Orders 41 10.04 Notification to Surety 41 10.05 Claims 41 Article 11 - Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work 42 11.01 Cost of the Work 42 11.02 Allowances 45 11.03 Unit Price Work 45 Article 12 - Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Times 46 12.01 Change of Contract Price 46 12.02 Change of Contract Times 47 12.03 Delays 47 Article 13 - Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work 48 13.01 Notice of Defects 48 13.02 Access to Work 48 13.03 Tests and Inspections 48 13.04 Uncovering Work 49 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work 50 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work 50 13.07 Correction Period 50 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work 51 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work 51 Article 14 - Payments to Contractor and Completion 52 14.01 Schedule of Values 52 14.02 Progress Payments 52 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title 55 14.04 Substantial Completion 55 14.05 Partial Utilization • 56 14.06 Final Inspection 56 14.07 Final Payment 57 14.08 Final Completion Delayed 58 14.09 Waiver of Claims 58 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page iu Article 15 — Suspension of Work and Termination 58 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work 58 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause 58 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience 60 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate 60 Article 16 — Dispute Resolution 61 16.01 Methods and Procedures 61 Article 17 — Miscellaneous 61 17.01 Giving Notice 61 17.02 Computation of Times 61 17.03 Cumulative Remedies 62 17.04 Survival of Obligations 62 17.05 Controlling Law 62 17.06 Headings 62 EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page iv ARTICLE 1— DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda — Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement —The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos —Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid —The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. • 6. Bidder The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents —The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements —The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order —A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement: 10. Clain —A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract —The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 62 • 12. Contract Documents —Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price —The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times —The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer's written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor —The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work —See Paragraph 11.01 for definition. 17. Drawings —That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement —The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. - 19. Engineer —The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition —The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 23. Hazardous Waste —The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations —Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens —Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone —A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 2 of 62 27. Notice of Award —The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed —A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner —The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs — Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum — Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non - Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 32. Progress Schedule —A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project —The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material — Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Resident Project Representative The authorized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 37. Samples— Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship . that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 38. Schedule of Submittals A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 39. Schedule of Values —A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 3 of 62 • 40. Shop Drawings All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 41. Site —Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights -of -way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 42. Specifications —That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 43. Subcontractor —An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 44. Substantial Completion —The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 45. Successful Bidder —The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 46. Supplementary Conditions —That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 47. Supplier —A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor. 48. Underground Facilities —All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 49. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 50. Work —The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 51. Work Change Directive —A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 4 of 62 addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. • 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through F are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1. The Contract Documents include the terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed" or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day: 1. The word "day" means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. • D. Defective: 1. The word "defective," when modifying the word "Work," refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has - been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05). E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 5 of 62 1. The word "furnish," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word "install," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words "perform" or "provide," when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide" is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, "provide" is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well -known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 — PRELEVE NARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance. Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies ofDocuments A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. P p q p 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright C.) 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 6 of 62 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit instructions, receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of each respective party. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 7 of 62 the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from. Contractor's full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor's Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor's Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 — CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 8 of 62 • 1. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor's Review of Contract Documents During Peiformance of Work. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by • Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and: a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended t� provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer's approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright t 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 9 of 62 3. Engineer's written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to Owner or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user's sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data's creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60 -day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data's creator. ARTICLE 4 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 10 of 62 Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner's furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner's interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. • 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any "technical data" on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as' to require a change in the Contract Documents; or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 11 of 62 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer's Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer's findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments: 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following: a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03. 2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, neither Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 12 of 62 professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 13 of 62 or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the "technical data" contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such "technical data," Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 14 of 62 Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 4.06.E. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual's or entity's own negligence. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 15 of 62 I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 — BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney -in -fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of that individual's authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney -in -fact signed each bond. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do°-business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner -or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 16 of 62 B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. C. Failure of Owner to demand such certificates or other evidence of Contractor's full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of Owner to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. D. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor. E. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. 5.04 Contractor's Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason; 5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and 6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 17 of 62 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, be written on an occurrence basis, include as additional insureds (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 4. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 5. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 6. include completed operations coverage: a. Such insurance shall remain in effect for two years after final payment. b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter. 5.05 Owner's Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner's option, may purchase and maintain at Owner's expense Owner's own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 18 of 62 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee; 2. be written on a Builder's Risk "all- risk" policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage (other than that caused by flood), and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and 7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such equipment breakdown insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as a loss payee. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other loss payee to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 19 of 62 insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or loss payees thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 20 of 62 against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the loss payees, as their interests may appear, subject to ,the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order. B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non - conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 21 of 62 ARTICLE 6 — CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall rovide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work p p Yq p Y Y o and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 22 of 62 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and "Or-Equals" A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or "or- equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. "Or-Equal" Items: If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or- equal" item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright C� 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 23 of 62 2. Substitute Items: a. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or- equal" item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented by the General Requirements, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified; 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item, and c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 24 of 62 4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer's sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer's Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No "or equal" or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer's review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an approved Shop Drawing for an "or equal." Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor- to furnish at Contractor's expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer's Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer's costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor's Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or "or- equal" at Contractor's expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright t 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 25 of 62 other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor 2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as a loss payee on the property insurance provided in Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or loss payees (and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 26 of 62 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by patent rights or copyrights. C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. 6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 27 of 62 court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor's responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 28 of 62 shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engineer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner's safety programs; if any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner's safety programs that are applicable to the Work. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 29 of 62 D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor's safety program with which Owner's and Engineer's employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). F. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs. 6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 30 of 62 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. 2. Samples: a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D. B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures: 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. 2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 31 of 62 Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer's Review: 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular. means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures: 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor's warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright C 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 32 of 62 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 33 of 62 Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings; calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 34 of 62 ARTICLE 7 — OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner's employees, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner's employees, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 35 of 62 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor's wrongful actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor under direct contract to Owner for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's wrongful action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 — OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer. 8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.0 and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 36 of 62 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner's responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner's Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety .precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner's responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents. 8.12 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Owner's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Owner has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 9 — ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner's Representative A. Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor's executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer's efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 37 of 62 and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer's visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer's authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work, Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer's consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 38 of 62 B. In connection with Engineer's authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12. D. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer's written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question. B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believes that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer's decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. C. Engineer's written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer's Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright CO 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 39 of 62 B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with, the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. 9.10 Compliance with Safety Program A. While at the Site, Engineer's employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor's safety programs of which Engineer has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.13.D. ARTICLE 10 — CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.D. EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 40 of 62 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner's correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. • 10.04 Notification to Surety • A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer's Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims. B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Times shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 41 of 62 opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Claim; or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer's written action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers' compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 42 of 62 Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. AU rights reserved. Page 43 of 62 f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor's fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor's principal and branch offices other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A. C. Contractor's Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost -plus, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor's fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 44 of 62 D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances: 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: 1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. AU rights reserved. Page 45 of 62 D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 — CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed, lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor's Fee: The Contractor's fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor's fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor's fee shall be five percent; EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 46 of 62 c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor's fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor's fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01. C.2. a through 12.01. C.2. e, inclusive. 12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays' A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor's entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright (0 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 47 of 62 control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer, and their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 — TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor's safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.0 and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in Paragraph 13.04.C; and 3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 48 of 62 C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 49 of 62 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor's use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner's written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 50 of 62 resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 51 of 62 equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 — PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provided in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments: 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 52 of 62 Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. B. Review of Applications: 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer's observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional, and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer's knowledge, information and belief: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor's being . entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer's responsibility to observe the Work. 3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor. 4. Neither Engineer's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer's recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer: a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 53 of 62 b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens. 5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer's opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replacement; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02. A. C. Payment Becomes Due: 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer's recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment: 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because: a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended; or EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 54 of 62 Ii 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment: 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of inspection, marked -up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.6; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. 3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer's Review of Application and Acceptance: 1. If, on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work • has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer's recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 57 of 62 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer's recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 — SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. AB rights reserved. Page 58 of 62 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor's violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion); 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere; and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor's services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. E. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 59 of 62 • F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping the as permitted by this Paragraph. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright CO 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. _ Page 60 of 62 ARTICLE 16 — DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer's action under Paragraph 10.05.0 or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05. C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 — MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 61 of 62 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 62 of 62 SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR DURHAM AERATION BASIN 4 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS, PROJECT NO. 6446 GENERAL These Supplementary Conditions make additions, deletions or revisions to the Section 00700 - General Conditions of the Contract Documents. All provisions which are not so added to, deleted or revised remain in full force and effect. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. SC- 1.01.A — Delete and replace the following paragraphs: 15. Contractor -- Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and the Contractor's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. Delete paragraph 1.01.A.19 and insert the following in lieu thereof: 19. Engineer -- Person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and the Engineer's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. Delete paragraph 1.01.A.30 and insert the following in lieu thereof: 30. Owner -- The individual, entity, public body or authority identified as such in the Agreement and the Owner's authorized representatives who are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. SC- 1.01.A — Add new paragraphs immediately following Paragraph 1.01.A.51 as follows: 52. Final Completion- -See Paragraph 14.07.B.1 and SC- 14.07.B.1 for definition. 53. Latent Defect - -A defect in the Work of which the Owner has no actual knowledge. 54. Specialist- -The term Specialist refers to a person, partnership, firm, or corporation of established reputation (or if newly organized, whose personnel have previously established a reputation in the same field), which is regularly engaged in, and which maintains a regular force of workers skilled in either (as applicable) manufacturing of fabricated items required by the Contract Documents, or otherwise performing Work required by the Contract Documents. Where the Specifications require the installation by a Specialist, that term shall also be deemed to mean either the manufacturer of the items, a person, partnership, firm, or corporation licensed by the manufacturer, or a person, partnership, firm, or corporation who will perform the Work under the manufacturer's direct supervision. November 2010 00800 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 55. Consultant —An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Engineer or Engineer's Consultant for performance of work on the Project. SC - 2.01 – Add the following paragraph immediately after 2.01.B: C. Public Works Bond: Before starting any Work on the Project, Contractor shall have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board, unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). Contractor shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the Subcontractor to have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting work on the Project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). Contractor shall include copies of both its public works bond and the public works bonds from its Subcontractors in the copies of the bonds required in 2.01.A above. SC 2.02.A – Delete the first sentence of Article 2.02.A in its entirety and replace with the following sentence: Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to five copies of the Project Manual (Specifications and half -size Drawings) and two copies of full -size Drawings. SC 2.03.A – Delete the third sentence of Paragraph 2.03.A in its entirety. SC 2.05.A – Before Starting Construction: Add the following to paragraph 2.05.A: 4. A preliminary schedule of payments showing projected cash flow. SC 2.07.A – Initial Acceptance of Schedules: Add the following to paragraph 2.07.A: 4. Contractor's schedule of payments will be acceptable if it provides a reasonable projection of payments in relationship to the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Values. SC 3.01.A – Add the following at the end of Paragraph 3.01.A: In resolving inconsistencies among two or more components of the Contract Documents, precedence shall be given in the following order: 1. Permits from outside agencies 2. Agreement 3. Addenda 4. Contractor's Bid (Bid Form) 5. Supplementary Conditions 6. General Conditions • 7. Specifications – Division 01 8. Specifications – Divisions 02 – 16 9. Drawings 10. Bonds Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, Engineer's written interpretation and clarifications and Notice to Proceed, in precedence listed, will take precedence over all other Contract Document components referenced herein. Figure dimensions on Drawings take November 2010 00800 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • precedence over scaled dimensions. The Drawings with the higher level of detail take precedence over less detailed Drawings. SC 3.03.A.3 — Delete Paragraph 3.03.A.3 in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. SC 3.04.B.2 — Delete the parenthetical phrase in its entirety in Paragraph 3.04.B.2 and replace with the following: (Subject to the provisions of Section 01300 — Submittals) SC 3.05.A — Delete Paragraph 3.05.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, shall not: SC — Delete Paragraph 4.01.B in its entirety. SC 4.02.A.1 — Delete Paragraph 4.02.A.1 in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and SC - 4.02. - Add new paragraphs immediately after paragraph 4.02.B of the General Conditions as follows: C. In preparation of Drawings and Specifications, Engineer or Engineer's Consultants have utilized the following drawings of physical conditions: 1. Durham Phase 2A Construction Drawings; and 2. Aeration Basin 3 Plug Flow Modifications Project No. 6138 Construction Drawings. D. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but the technical data contained therein upon which Contractor may rely as provided in paragraph 4.02.B of the General Conditions and as identified and established above are incorporated by reference. Contractor is not entitled to rely upon other information and data utilized by Engineer and Engineer's Consultants in the preparation of Drawings and Specifications. 1. None. D. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract Documents, but as established above, the Contractor may reasonably rely on the general accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports and drawings, except for such physical dimensions that can be field November 2010 00800 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions verified. However, the interpretation of such technical data, including interpolation or extrapolation thereof, and opinions contained in such reports and drawings are not to be relied on by the Contractor. Copies of these reports and drawings may be examined at the office of the Owner or Engineer during regular business hours if said reports and drawings are not _, bound herein. SC 4.02.B — In the first sentence, insert the word "reasonably" between the words "may" and "rely" and delete the second sentence (beginning with "Such" and ending with "Conditions ") of Paragraph 4.02.B. SC 4.04.A.1 — Delete the words "provided by others" following the word "data" from the end of this paragraph. SC 4.05.A — Add the following sentence after the first sentence of Paragraph 4.05.A: Reference points shall be as shown on the Drawings. SC 4.06.A — Delete Paragraph 4.06.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. SC 4.06.B — In the first sentence, insert the word "reasonably" between the words "may" and "rely". SC- 4.06.E - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety. SC- 4.06.G - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety. SC — Delete the second sentence of Paragraph 5.01.A in its entirety and replace with the following: These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after date of Final Completion of the Project and acceptance by the Owner, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. SC 5.02.A - Add the following to Paragraph 5.02. A: Such surety shall have a rating of not less than A -X in the most current edition of Best's Rating Guide. November 2010 00800 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC- 5.03.A — Supplement Paragraph 5.03.A as, follows: Include the following parties or entities as additional insureds: 1. Clean Water Services (Owner) 2. West Yost Associates, Inc. Deliver all certificates of insurance required by the Contract Documents to Owner with the executed Agreement. SC -5.04 - Delete Paragraph 5.04 in its entirety and replace with the following paragraphs: 5.04 Contractor's Liability Insurance A. Insurance Generally: Contractor shall provide the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs therefor. 1. Contractor shall provide a certificate of insurance, in a form acceptable to Owner, meeting all of the insurance requirements of the Contract. Insurance is to be placed with insurers acceptable to Owner with a minimum Best's rating of A -X. 2. Before commencing Work under this Contract, Contractor shall furnish Owner with certificates of insurance specified herein showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies and containing substantially the following statement: "The insurance covered by this certificate will not be canceled or materially altered, except after 30 days' written notice has been received by Owner." 3. In case of the breach of any provision of this Paragraph, Owner, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of Contractor, such insurance as Owner may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from retainage or from any monies that may be due or become due Contractor under this Contract. B. Contractor and Subcontractor Insurance: Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until Contractor has obtained all the insurance required hereunder and submitted the requisite certificate of insurance and such insurance has been reviewed by Owner, nor shall Contractor allow any Subcontractor to commence Work on any subcontract until the insurance specified below has been obtained. Review of the insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor hereunder. • November 2010 00800 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions C. Workers' Compensation: Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract workers' compensation insurance required by Oregon law and employer's liability coverage with minimum limits of $500,000 for all of Contractor's employees to be engaged in Work pursuant to this Contract. The insurer shall agree to waive all rights of subrogation against Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers for losses arising from Work performed by Contractor for Owner. In case any such work is sublet, Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to provide the same workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for all of the subcontractor's employees to be engaged in such Work. Where such Work under this Contract includes any water or navigational exposure, coverage shall be included to cover the Federal Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act and the Federal Jones Act. D. Liability Insurance: Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers shall be included as additional insured on all Contractor's insurance policies as respects liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of Contractor, products and completed operations of Contractor; premises owned, leased or used by Contractor, or automobiles owned, leased, hired or borrowed by Contractor. Coverage shall include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers. The "other insurance" clause in the required insurance shall not apply to the insurance policies of the Owner. E. Commercial and Automobile Liability Insurance: Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract coverage that is at least as broad as paragraphs A and B of this section, and with the limits required below: 1. Commercial General Liability Insurance: "Occurrence" Form including XCU, with a $ (see schedule below) combined single limit per occurrence and a $ (see schedule below) Products and Completed Operations and General Annual Aggregate limit. The policy shall be endorsed to provide full Products and Completed Operations and General Annual Aggregate limits for the Project independent of any other project of Contractor. (Note: "Claims Made" coverage may be considered subject to additional conditions on a case -by -case basis.) Schedule for Commercial General Liability Limits Product & Completed Operations and General Contract Bid Per Occurrence Limit Annual Aggregate Limit Less than $100,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 $100,000 - $1,000,000 $1,500,000 $2,000,000 Greater than $1,000,000 $4,000,000 $5,000,000 November 2010 00800 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 2. Automobile Liability Insurance: Code 1 ( "any auto ") and Uninsured Motorist Endorsement with a $ (see schedule below) combined single limit per occurrence. Contract Bid Per Occurrence Limit $0 - $1,000,000 $500,000 Greater than $1,000,000 $1,000,000 F. Excess/Umbrella Liability: If Contractor's primary- coverage commercial general liability and automobile coverages do not meet the minimum limit required, Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Contract excess or umbrella liability over the primary policies sufficient to meet the total aggregate limits required by this Contract. G. Pollution Liability Insurance: Contractor shall obtain, at Contractor's expense, and keep in effect during the term of the Contract, Pollution Liability Insurance covering the Contractor's liability for bodily injury, property damage and environmental damage from sudden accidental pollution and related cleanup cost incurred by the Contractor, all arising out of the Work or services including the transportation risk to be performed under this Contract. Combined single limit per occurrence shall not be less than $1,000,000. Annual aggregate limit shall not be less than $1,000,000. H. Other Insurance Provisions: 1. Contractor shall show evidence that the required commercial and automobile liability is in effect for the entire term of this Contract. 2. Owner shall be named as an "Additional Insured" on all Iiability policies in effect under this Contract. 3. Contractor's coverage shall be primary insurance for Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers. Any insurance or self - insurance maintained by Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers shall be in excess of Contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. 4. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to Owner and its officers, employees, agents or volunteers. 5. Coverage shall state that Contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom a claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. November 2010 00800 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions I. All Coverages: Any accidents or incidents causing injury or property damage shall be reported by Contractor to Owner and Contractor's insurer. Any deductible or self - insured retentions in excess of 1 percent of the Contract amount must be declared to and approved by Owner. At the option of Owner, the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self - insured retentions as respects Owner and its officers, employees, agents and volunteers, or Contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. In the event any work under this Contract is performed by a subcontractor, Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Contract by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance. J. Insurance Coverage for Special Conditions: When the construction is to be accomplished within a public or private right -of -way requiring special insurance coverage, Contractor shall conform to the particular requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and provide the required insurance. Contractor shall include in its liability policy all endorsements that may be required for the protection of the Owner and its officers, agents and employees. Insurance coverage for special conditions, when required shall be provided as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. K. No Personal Liability for Public Officials: In carrying out any of the provisions hereof in exercising any authority granted by the Contract, there will be no personal liability upon any public official. L. Additional Insurance: In addition to the specific insurance requirements set forth above, Contractor shall also provide all insurance and/or certificates required by federal, state, county or municipal bodies, as well as railroads and public utilities. SC- 5.06.A — Delete the word "Owner" in the first sentence and replace with the word "Contractor ". SC- 5.06.B — Delete the word "Owner" in the first line and replace with the word "Contractor ". SC- 5.06.E — Replace the word "Owner" with the word "Contractor" and replace the word "Contractor with the word "Owner" throughout this paragraph. SC- 5.07.B.1. - Delete this Paragraph in its entirety and renumber Paragraph 5.07.B.2 to become 5.07.B.1. SC-6.01.B — Add the following after the first sentence of Paragraph 6.O1.B: If a replacement is necessary, the replacement shall also be a competent resident superintendent and shall be subject to approval by Owner. The Contractor's superintendent shall be present at the Site at all times while Work is in progress and shall be available by phone for emergencies 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. If at any time the superintendent leaves the Project Site while Work is in progress, Engineer shall be notified and provided with the name of the Contractor's representative having responsible charge. November 2010 00800 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC- 6.02.B — Add the following sentence to Paragraph 6.02.B: Contractor (and Subcontractors) regular work hours shall be between 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. on weekdays only. SC -6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment: —Add the following paragraphs immediately after paragraph 6.03.C: D. Until Substantial Completion of the Work is acknowledged by Owner, Contractor shall have the responsible charge and care of the Work and of materials to be used herein, including materials for which Contractor has received partial payment or materials which have been furnished by Owner, and shall bear the risk of injury, loss, or damage to any part thereof by the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution of the Work or not. E. Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries, losses, or damages to any portion of the Work or the materials occasioned by any cause before the Work's completion and acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. Where necessary to protect the Work or materials from damage, Contractor shall, at Contractor's own expense, provide suitable drainage and erect such temporary structures or rent such structures as are necessary to protect the Work or materials from damage. The suspension of the Work or the granting of an extension of time for any cause whatever shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's responsibility for the Work and materials as specified herein. F. When the quality of a material, process, or article is not specifically set forth in the Contract Documents, the best available quality of the material, process, or article shall be provided. SC- 6.04.A — Add the following subparagraph to paragraph 6.04.A immediately after subparagraph 6.04.A2: 3. If, in the opinion of Engineer, Contractor falls behind the accepted Construction Schedule due to actions or neglect of Contractor or Contractor's agents, servants, employees, officers, Subcontractors, directors, or any party contracting to perform part or all of the Work or to supply any equipment or materials, Contractor shall take steps, including, but not limited to, increasing the number of personnel, shifts, and /or overtime operations, days of work, and /or amount of construction equipment until such time as the Work is back on schedule. Contractor shall also submit for review no later than the time of submittal of the next request for partial payment, such supplementary schedule or schedules as may be necessary to demonstrate the manner in which the acceptable rate of progress will be regained, all without additional cost to Owner. SC- 6.05.E. — Delete the word "reasonable" from in front of the word "charges" in two places in this Paragraph. November 2010 00800 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC- 6.06.B — Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others: Delete the first sentence of the paragraph 6.06.B and insert the following in lieu thereof, and add subparagraph 6.06.B.1: B. Contractor shall submit to the Owner a list of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for acceptance by Owner as stipulated in the Bidding Documents. Owner's acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto within two weeks of submittal of the list) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation. 1. Subcontracting: Contractor shall perform with Contractor's own organization Work amounting to not less than 51 percent of the combined value of all items of the Work covered by the Contract. SC- 6.07.A — Patent fees and Royalties: add the following subparagraphs immediately after paragraph 6.07.A: 1. Contractor shall furnish to Owner at the time of initial submittal, satisfactory evidence that Suppliers of proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes to be furnished or used in the performance of the Work do indemnify, keep, and save harmless Contractor from all liabilities, judgments, costs, damages, and expenses which may arise from the use of such proprietary materials, equipment, devices, or processes, furnished to Contractor for incorporation in or use in performance of the Work and their operation by Owner after acceptance of the Work. Such satisfactory evidence shall consist of patent licenses or patent releases covering proprietary materials, equipment, devices or processes. SC- 6.08.A — In Paragraph 6.08.A after the words, "Supplementary Conditions ", add the words, "or Division I — General Requirements ". SC -6.08 — Add the following paragraph immediately after paragraph 6.08.A: B. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits. Owner, however, will pay the cost of the permits. SC- 6.09.B — Insert the word "primary" in front of the word "responsibility" in the second sentence of this paragraph. November 2010 00800 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC -6.09 - Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.09.C.: D. The following paragraphs include without limitation the standard contract clauses that are required in every public contract in accordance with the Oregon Revised Statutes. Contractor shall include any other standard contract clauses required by federal, state, and local laws, ordinances and regulations. This Agreement shall include by reference any other standard contract clauses required by federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations. 1. Prompt Payment: Contractor shall promptly pay all of its obligations arising out of or in connection with the Work, including, but not limited to, payments (1) to all persons, as due, supplying to Contractor labor, equipment, services or material for the performance of the Work, (2) of all contributions or amounts due the Industrial Accident Fund from Contractor or any Subcontractor incurred in the performance of the Work, and (3) to the Department of Revenue of all sums withheld from employees under ORS 316.167. 2. Prompt Payment Policy: It is the policy of the State of Oregon that all payments due on a public improvement contract and owed by a contracting agency shall be paid promptly. No public contracting agency is exempt from the provisions of ORS 279C.570. 3. Contractor's Failure to Make Prompt Payment: If, upon reasonable concern by Owner that Contractor has failed, neglected or refused to make prompt payment of any claim for labor, equipment, services or materials furnished to Contractor or a Subcontractor by any person in connection with the Project as such claim becomes due, Owner may pay such claim to the person furnishing the labor, equipment, services or materials and charge the amount of the payment against funds due or to become due Contractor under the Contract. Owner reserves the right to make payments directly or by multiple -payee check and Contractor hereby consents to such direct and multiple -payee check payments. Upon Owner's request, Contractor shall furnish to Owner the information required to facilitate such payments with each application for payment, including (1) names, addresses, and telephone numbers of persons making any such claim for labor, equipment, services or material, and (2) a complete listing of outstanding amounts owed to all such persons. 4. Contractor's and First - Tier Subcontractor's Failure to Make Payment After Payment From Owner; Interest Penalty: If Contractor or a first -tier Subcontractor fails, neglects or • refuses to make payment to a person furnishing labor, equipment, services or materials in connection with the Project within thirty (30) days after receipt of payment from Owner or Contractor, Contractor or first -tier Subcontractor shall owe the person the amount due plus interest charges commencing at the end of the 10 -day period that payment is due under ORS 279C.580(4) and ending upon final payment, unless payment is subject to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580. The rate of interest charged to Contractor or first -tier Subcontractor on the amount due shall equal three times the discount rate on 90 -day commercial paper in effect at the Federal Reserve Bank in the Federal Reserve district that includes Oregon on the date that is 30 days after the date when payment was received from Owner or from Contractor, but the rate of interest may not exceed 30 percent. The amount of interest may not be waived. November 2010 00800 -11 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 5. Construction Contractors Board Complaint: If Contractor or a Subcontractor fails, neglects or refuses to make payment to a person furnishing labor, equipment, services or materials in connection with the Project, the person may file a complaint with the Construction Contractors Board, unless payment is subject to a good faith dispute as defined in ORS 279C.580. 6. Continuing Liability of Contractor and Surety: Payment by Owner of a claim in the manner authorized in this paragraph does not relieve Contractor or Contractor's surety from obligation with respect to any unpaid claims. 7. Prevailing Rate of Wage: This Project is a public works project subject to the prevailing wage rate requirements in ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870. Contractor and any Subcontractors shall comply with ORS 279C.838 and ORS 279C.840. Workers in each trade or occupation required for the Work of this Project shall not be paid less than the minimum hourly rate of wage for such workers incorporated by reference in Section 00810 of the specifications for this Agreement. 8. Fee to be Paid to BOLL: Owner will pay the required fee to the Bureau of Labor and Industries pursuant to the provisions of ORS 279C.825. 9. Compliance with Laws /Tax Laws: Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws, statutes, codes, regulations, rules, orders, and rulings as well as all applicable construction industry standards, including without limitation, those governing labor, materials, equipment, construction procedures, safety, health, sanitation, and the environment. Contractor agrees to indemnify, hold harmless, reimburse, and defend Owner from and against any penalties or liabilities arising out of violations of such obligations by Contractor or its Subcontractors or Suppliers at any tier. Contractor must also comply with all Oregon tax laws. 10. Employee Drug Testing Program: Contractor shall certify to Owner that Contractor has initiated, and shall maintain through the completion of the Work of the Project, an employee drug testing program. 11. Work Day/Work Week: No person shall be employed for more than 10 hours in any one day, or 40 hours in any one week, except in cases of necessity, emergency, or where the public policy absolutely requires it, and in such cases, the employee shall be paid at least time and a half pay (1) for all overtime in excess of eight hours a day or 40 hours in any one week when the work week is five consecutive days, Monday through Friday, or (2) for all overtime in excess of 10 hours a day or 40 hours in any one week when the work is four consecutive days, Monday through Friday, and (3) for all work performed on Saturday, and on any legal holiday specified in ORS 279C.540. 12. Notice of Required Work Hours: Contractor, each Subcontractor and each lower -tier Subcontractor must give notice to its employees in writing, either at the time of hire or before commencement of work, or by posting a notice in a location frequented by its employees, of the number of hours per day and days per week that the employees may be required to work. November 2010 00800 -12 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 13. Claims for Overtime: Any worker employed by Contractor shall be foreclosed from the right to collect for any overtime provided in ORS 279C.540 unless a claim for payment is filed with Contractor within 90 days from the completion of the contact, provided Contractor has: (1) Caused a circular clearly printed in boldfaced 12 -point type and containing a copy of this section to be posted in a prominent place alongside the door of the timekeeper's office or in a similar place which is readily available and freely visible to any or all workers employed on the work; (2) Maintained such circular continuously posted from the inception to the completion of the contract on which workers are or have been employed. 14. Worker's Compensation: All employers, including Contractor, that employ subject workers who work under this Contract in the State of Oregon shall comply with ORS 656.017 and provide the required Workers' Compensation coverage, unless such employers are exempt under ORS 656.126. Contractor shall ensure that each of its Subcontractors complies with these requirements. 15. Prompt Payment for Medical Services: Contractor shall promptly make payment, as • due, to any person, co- partnership, association or corporation, furnishing medical, surgical or hospital care services or other needed care and attention, incident to sickness or injury, to the employees of Contractor, of all sums that Contractor agrees to pay for the services and all moneys and sums that Contractor collected or deducted from the wages of employees under any law, contract or agreement for the purpose of providing or paying for the services. 16. Prompt Payment by Contractor and Subcontractors; Interest Penalty: Contractor shall include in each subcontract and supply contract entered into by Contractor a clause obligating the Contractor (1) to make payment to the Subcontractor or Supplier for satisfactory performance within ten (10) days out of such amounts as are paid to the Contractor by Owner under the Contract, and (2) if payment is not made within 30 days after receipt of payment from the Owner, to pay the Subcontractor or Supplier an interest penalty on amounts due in the case of each payment not made in accordance with the payment clause included in the subcontract as required by this paragraph (1) above. The interest penalty shall be for the period beginning on the day after the required payment date and ending on the date on which payment of the amount due is made, and computed at the rate specified in Paragraph 6.09.D.4 above. Contractor shall also include in each subcontract and supply contract entered into by Contractor a clause obligating each Subcontractor and Supplier to include a payment clause and an interest penalty clause conforming to the standards of this paragraph and Paragraph 6.09.D.4 above in each of its subcontracts and supply contracts and to include such clauses in their subcontracts and supply contracts with each lower -tier Subcontractor or Supplier. 17. List of Subcontractors/Licensing With Construction Contractors Board: Before commencing Work, Contractor shall provide to Owner and Engineer a list of all Subcontractors and Suppliers to be involved on the Project. The list shall be attached to the Agreement as an Exhibit. The receipt of such list shall not require Owner or Engineer to investigate the qualifications of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers, nor shall it waive the right of Owner to later object to or reject any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier. It shall be the responsibility of Contractor to assure that all Subcontractors are duly registered with the Oregon State Construction Contractors Board and have not been declared ineligible to work on a public contract. November 2010 00800 -13 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 18. Material Salvage: To the extent the scope of the Work for this Agreement requires demolition, Contractor must salvage or recycle construction and demolition debris, if feasible and cost - effective. 19. Composting: To the extent the scope of the Work for this Agreement requires lawn and landscape maintenance, Contractor must compost or mulch yard waste material at an approved site, if feasible and cost - effective. 20. Environmental and Natural Resources Laws: Pursuant to ORS 279C.525, the following is a list of Federal, State, and Local agencies that have enacted ordinances or regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of natural resources that may affect the performance of this Agreement. The following list may not include all such agencies that have enacted ordinances or regulations relating to the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources. Federal Agencies: Agriculture, Dept. of Forest Service Natural Resources Conservation Service Defense, Dept. of Army Corps of Engineers Coast Guard Environmental Protection Agency Interior, Dept. of U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service Bureau of Land Management Bureau of Indian Affairs Bureau of Reclamation Labor, Dept. of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Transportation, Dept. of Federal Highway Administration Bureau of Mines Federal Energy Regulatory Commission Geological Survey Health and Human Services, Dept. of Housing and Urban Development, Dept. of . Mine Safety and Health Administration Minerals Management Service National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Office of Surface Mining, Reclamation and Enforcement Water Resources Council State Agencies: Administrative Services, Dept. of Agriculture, Dept. of Columbia River Gorge Commission Consumer and Business Services, Dept. of November 2010 00800 -14 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions Oregon Occupational Safety and Health Division Environmental Quality, Dept. of Fish and Wildlife, Dept. of Forestry, Dept. of Geology and Mineral Industries, Dept. of Human Services, Dept. of Labor and Industries, Bureau of Land Conservation and Development, Dept. of Natural Resources, Dept. of Parks and Recreation, Dept. of State Fire Marshall State Lands, Dept. of Water Resources Department Local Agencies: City Councils Circuit Courts County Commissioners, Boards of Fire Districts Historical Preservation Commission Planning Commissions Port Districts Special Districts Oregon Tribal Governments 21. Retainage: The withholding of retainage by Contractor or Subcontractor shall be in accordance with ORS 279C.550 to ORS 279C.570, and 279C.845(7), 22. Liens: Contractor shall not permit any lien or claim to be filed or prosecuted against the state, county, school district, municipality, municipal corporation or subdivision thereof, on account of any labor or material furnished. 23. Notice of Clain) on Bond: The notice of claim required by ORS 279C.600 must be sent by registered or certified mail or hand - delivered no later than 180 days after the day the person last provided labor or furnished materials or 180 days after the worker listed in the notice of claim by the Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries last provided labor. The notice may be sent or delivered to Contractor or Subcontractor at any place Contractor or Subcontractor maintains an office or conducts business or at the residence of Contractor or Subcontractor. If the claim is for a required contribution to a fund of an employee benefit plan, the notice required by ORS 279C.600 must be sent or delivered within 200 Days after the employee last provided labor or materials. The notice shall be in writing substantially as follows: To (here insert the name of Contractor or Subcontractor and the name of the Owner): November 2010 00800 -15 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions Notice is hereby given that the undersigned (here insert the name of the claimant) has a claim for (here insert a brief description of the labor or materials performed or furnished and the person by whom performed or furnished; if the claim is for other than labor or materials, insert a brief description of the claim) in the sum of (here insert the amount) dollars against the (here insert public works bond or payment bond, as applicable) taken from (here insert the name of the principal and, if known, the surety or sureties upon the public works bond or payment bond) for the work of (here insert a brief description of the work concerning which the public works bond or payment bond was taken). Such material or labor was supplied to (here insert the name of Contractor or Subcontractor). (here to be signed) SC- 6.12.A — In the last sentence of Paragraph 6.12.A: delete the words, "these record documents" and replace with the words, "these record Drawings and record specifications" and insert the words, "annotated (marked -up to reflect field changes, if any) final" before the words, "Shop Drawings ". SC- 6.13.B — Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.13.B: Contractor shall be aware that permit- required confined spaces exist in or near the Project Site. Entry to these spaces must be accomplished in compliance with the requirements of OAR 166 - 150 -0190 (29 CFR 1910.146). Examples of permit - required confined spaces include but are not limited to the following: 1. Open tanks beyond the handrails including clarifiers, aeration basins, channels, etc. 2. Manholes. 3. Flow control structures which have the potential to contain sewage. 4. Enclosed tanks including digesters, clarifiers, aerated grit basins, chemical tanks, etc. 5. Wet well and dry wells of pump stations. 6. Electrical vaults. The hazards associated with these confined spaces may include but are not limited to: 1. Oxygen deficiency. 2. Combustible vapors including methane. 3. Slip hazards. 4. Fall /retrieval hazard. 5. Engulfment hazard. 6. Lockout required of mechanical and electrical devices. 7. Toxic or hazardous chemicals including hydrogen sulfide and process chemicals. 8. Traffic hazards. 9. Hot work and ignition sources. 10. Potential for rapid changes in working conditions. 11. Painting or coating application activities often pose temporary hazards. November 2010 00800 -16 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions Prior to beginning Work in permit- required confined spaces, Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of Contractor's permit- required confined space entry plan/program including a copy of the permit forms that will be used by Contractor. Upon request by Contractor, Owner will review with Contractor, Owner's permit- required confined space program and specific procedures Owner would incorporate in spaces entered. Owner will coordinate any of its entries into the same spaces with the Contractor. When the permit- required confined space Work is completed, Contractor shall inform Owner, in writing, of any hazards encountered or changes made resulting in different hazards within the space. SC 6.13.D — Change "D" to "E" in Paragraph 6.13.D and insert the following Paragraph as 6.13.D: D. Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor shall have prepared Contractor's written plan for the Project- specific safety precautions and programs, complete with respect to procedures and actions that Contractor intends for Contractor and all others as provided in Paragraphs 6.13.A.1 and 13.02, in order for Contractor and all others to comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations. Contractor's plan for safety precautions and programs shall have been approved and endorsed by Contractor's designated safety representative required in Paragraph 6.14. SC 6.13.E an 6.13.F — Re -label existing paragraphs 6.13.E. and 6.13.F to become 6.13.H and 6.13. SC - 6.13 — Insert the following paragraphs as 6.13.F and 6.13.G: F. Contractor shall revise Contractor's plan for safety precautions and programs at appropriate times to reflect changes in construction conditions, the Work, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, and the requirements of Paragraph 13.02. Contractor shall disseminate the original plan and revisions to all others indicated in Paragraphs 6.13.A.1 and 13.02. G. Contractor's plan for safety precautions and programs will not require more stringent safety requirements, training or other qualifications for all others, including those specified in Paragraph 13.02 and their employees, than Contractor sets forth for comparable activity and responsibility of Contractor, Subcontractors and Suppliers and their respective employees. SC - 6.17 — Delete Paragraph 6.17 in its entirety. See Section 01300 — Submittals of Division 1 - General Requirements. November 2010 00800 -17 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC- 6.20.A — Delete Paragraph 6.20.A in its entirety and replace it with the following paragraph: A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless, reimburse and defend Owner and Engineer and the officers, directors, partners, members, employees, agents, Consultants and Subcontractors of each and any of them, and the successors in interest of the foregoing, from, for and against suits, actions, claims, damages, penalties, liabilities, losses and expenses (including but not limited to all fees and related costs, disbursements and expenses of engineers, architects, attorneys and expert witness' fees) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, but only to the extent caused by: 1) the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2) breach of this Contract by Contractor. SC- 6.21.B — Add the following sentence to Paragraph 6.21.B: The design professional shall be registered in the State of Oregon. SC- 6.21.D — In the last sentence of Paragraph 6.21.D, delete the phrase "Paragraph 6.17.D.1" and replace with "Section 01300 — Submittals ". SC -7.01 — Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.01.C: D. Should Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor at the Site, or should any claim arising out of or resulting from Contractor's performance of the Work at the Site be made by any separate contractor against Contractor, Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's Consultants or any other person, Contractor shall promptly attempt to settle with such other contractor by agreement, or to otherwise resolve the dispute by mediation, arbitration or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify, hold harmless, reimburse and defend Owner and Engineer and the officers, directors, partners, members, employees, agents, Consultants and Subcontractors of each and any of them, and the successors in interest of the foregoing, from, for and against suits, actions, claims, damages, penalties, liabilities, losses and expenses (including but not limited to all fees and related costs, disbursements and expenses of engineers, architects, attorneys and expert witness' fees) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of or resulting from any action, legal or equitable, brought by a separate contractor against Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's Consultants or the officers, directors, employees, agents, or other Consultants of each and any of them to the extent based on a claim caused by, arising out of, or resulting from Contractor's negligent or other failure of performance in the Work. November 2010 00800 -18 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions E. Should a separate contractor cause damage to the Work or property of Contractor or should the performance of work by any separate contractor at the Site give rise to any other claim, Contractor shall not institute any action, legal or equitable, against Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's Consultants or the officers, directors, employees, agents, or other Consultants of each and any of them or permit any action against any of them to be maintained and continued in its name or for its benefit in any court or before any mediator or arbitrator which seeks to impose liability on or to recover damages from Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's Consultants or the officers, directors, employees, agents, or other consultants of each and any of them on account of any such damage or claim. SC -7.02 — Delete Paragraphs 7.02.A and 7.02.B in their entireties and replace with the following: A. Engineer and Owner will have authority and responsibility for coordination of Site activities for various contractors and utility owners at and adjacent to the Project site. Contractor shall cooperate with this effort and assist the coordination of work activities conducted by other contractors performing such other work. B. Unless expressly assigned to Engineer or Owner, all other authority and responsibilities shall remain vested in each contractor and utility owner. SC- 7.03.B — Delete the word "wrongful" from the last sentence of this paragraph. SC- 7.03.0 — Delete Paragraph 7.03.0 in its entirety and replace with the following paragraph: C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor's action or inactions. SC- 8.02.A — In Paragraph 8.02.A, delete the words, "to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, ". SC- 8.05.A — Delete Paragraph 8.05.A in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner's identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. SC- 8.11.A — Delete Paragraph 8.11.A in its entirety and replace it with the following: A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner's responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. SC -8.12 — Change the paragraph reference "6.13.D" to "6.13.E." November 2010 00800 -19 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC-9.01.A — Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 9.01.A: and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. SC- 9.03.A — Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 9.03.A: B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be furnished by Owner. The responsibilities, authority, and limitations of the RPR are limited to those of Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 9.09 of the General Conditions and as set forth elsewhere in the Contract Documents and are further limited and described below. C. Responsibilities and Authority: 1. Schedules: Review and monitor the Progress Schedule, Schedule of Submittal submissions and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and consult with Engineer concerning acceptability. 2. Conferences and Meetings: Conduct or attend meetings with Contractor, such as preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, Work conferences and other Project related meetings. 3. Liaison: (i) Serve as Engineer's liaison with Contractor, working principally through Contractor's superintendent and assist in understanding the intent of the Contract Documents; (ii) assist Engineer in serving as Owner's liaison with Contractor when Contractor's operations affect Owner's onsite operations; (iii) assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information when required for proper execution of the Work. 4. Submittals: Receive Submittals which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and notify Engineer of availability for examination. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any Work or arrival of products at Site, when recognized, requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample if the Submittal has not been approved by Engineer. 5. Review of Work, Rejection of Defective Work, Inspections and Tests: (i) Conduct onsite observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents; (ii) inform Engineer and Contractor whenever RPR believes that any Work is defective; (iii) advise Engineer when RPR believes that any Work will not produce a complete Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents, or will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the complete Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents, or whenever RPR believes Work should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection, or approval; (iv) monitor to ensure that tests, equipment and systems startups and operating and maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records thereof; (v) observe, record and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to the test procedures and startups; and (vi) accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over the Project, record the results of these inspections and report to the Engineer. November 2010 00800 -20 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 6. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Inform Engineer when clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by Engineer. 7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor's suggestions for modifications in Drawings or Specifications and provide recommendations to Engineer; transmit to Contractor the decision issued by Engineer. 8. Records: (i) Maintain at the Site files for correspondence, conference records, Submittals including Shop Drawings and Samples, reproductions of original Contract Documents including all Addenda, the signed Agreement, Written Amendments, Work Change Directives, Change Orders, Field Orders, additional Drawings issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, Engineer's written clarifications and interpretations, progress reports, and other Project related documents; (ii) keep a record of pertinent Site conditions, activities, decisions and events. 9. Reports: (i) Furnish Engineer periodic reports of progress of the Work and of Contractor's compliance with the Progress Schedule and Schedule of Submittal submissions; (ii) consult with Engineer in advance of scheduled major tests, inspections or start of important phases of the Work; and (iii) assist in drafting proposed Change Orders, Work Change Directives, and Field Orders, and obtain backup material from Contractor as appropriate. 10. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor for compliance with the established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work completed and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not incorporated in the Work. 11. Certificates, Maintenance and Operation Manuals, Record Documents, and Site Records: During the course of the Work, monitor whether these documents and other data required to be assembled, maintained, and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have this material delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner prior to final payment for the Work. 12. Substantial Completion: (i) Conduct an inspection in the company of Engineer, Owner, and Contractor and prepare a list of items to be completed or corrected; (ii) submit to Engineer a list of observed items requiring completion or correction. 13. Final Completion: (i) Conduct final inspection in the company of Engineer, Owner, and Contractor; and (ii) notify Contractor and Engineer in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective; and (iii) observe that all items on final list have been completed, corrected, or accepted by Owner and make recommendations to Engineer concerning acceptance. November 2010 00800 -21 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions D. Limitations of Authority: Resident Project Representative will not: 1. have authority to authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials or equipment, unless authorized by Engineer; or 2. undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors or Contractor's superintendent; or 3. accept Submittals from anyone other than the Contractor; or 4. authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part; or 5. participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer. SC- 9.06.A - In Paragraph 9.06.A, delete the phrase "Paragraph 6.17" and replace with "Section 01300 — Submittals ". SC -9.09 — Add the following paragraph immediately following Paragraph 9.09.E: F. Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers and others on the Project, or their sureties, shall maintain no direct action against the Design Engineer of Record, its officers, employees, affiliated corporations, and Subcontractors, for any claim arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the engineering services performed. Only the Owner will be the beneficiary of any undertaking by the Design Engineer of Record. SC- 9.10.A. Change the reference to "paragraph 6.13.D" in this paragraph to "paragraph 6.13.E." SC- 10.O1.A — Change "B" to "E" in Paragraph 10.01.B and add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.01.A: B. Owner may, in anticipation of ordering an addition, deletion or revision to the Work, request Contractor to prepare a proposal of cost and times to perform Owner's contemplated changes in the Work. Contractor's written proposal shall be transmitted to the Engineer promptly, but not later than fourteen days after Contractor's receipt of Owner's written request and shall remain a firm offer for a period of not less than forty -five days after receipt thereof by Engineer. 1. Contractor is not authorized to proceed on an Owner contemplated change in the Work prior to Contractor's receipt of a Change Order (or Work Change Directive) incorporating such change into the Work. 2. Owner's request for proposal or multiple requests for proposals shall not justify a claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times (or Milestones). November 2010 00800 -22 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions C. In signing a Change Order, Owner and Contactor acknowledge and agree that: 1. The stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth in the Change Order includes payment for (i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change Order, (ii) Contractor's fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of progress schedules, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overhead; 2. The Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the change to the Work; 3. No reservation of rights to pursue subsequent claims on the Change Order will be made by either party; 4. No subsequent claim or amendment of the Contract Documents will arise out of or as a result of the Change Order; 5. In executing the Change Order, Contractor shall defend and indemnify Owner and Engineer and their officers, agents and employees from any and all claims of any kind by any Subcontractor or Supplier of any tier based upon the subject matter of any claim released hereunder by Contractor in the Change Order; and 6. Except as otherwise provided in the Change Order, the Contract, as amended, between Owner and Contractor remains in full force and effect. D. A copy of the Change Order form that will be used on the Project is attached as Exhibit A to the Supplementary Conditions. Requests for Information (RFI's) of the Contractor and Engineer's responses to RFI's that result in the development and execution of a Change Order shall be attached to and referenced in the Change Order. SC - 10.06 — Add the following paragraph to ARTICLE 10 — CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS: 10.06 Cost Reduction Incentive A. Contractor may submit cost reduction proposals to the Engineer for modifying the plans, Specifications, or other requirements of this Contract for the sole purpose of reducing the total cost of construction. The cost reduction proposal shall not impair the essential functions or characteristics of the Project, including, but not limited to, service Life, economy of operation, ease of maintenance, desired appearance, or safety standards. B. Cost reduction proposals shall contain the following information: 1. A description of both the existing Contract requirements and the proposed changes. 2. An itemization of the change in Contract requirements if the cost reduction proposal is adopted. November 2010 00800 -23 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions 3. A detailed estimate of the cost of performing the Work under the existing Contract and under the proposed change. The detailed estimates shall include all labor, material, equipment, Subcontractor, supervision, overhead and fee costs in sufficient detail as Owner deems appropriate and in accordance with Article 11. The detailed estimates shall also include adequate substantiation for such costs in the form of quantity surveys and Supplier and Subcontractor quotations. If requested by Owner, Contractor shall require any Subcontractors to provide detailed estimates in accordance with this Paragraph. 4. A CPM schedule analysis of the time associated with performing the Work under the existing Contract and under the proposed change. 5. A statement of the time within which the Engineer must make a decision on the cost reduction proposal. C. Engineer will not be liable to the Contractor for any failure to accept or act upon any cost reduction proposal submitted, nor for any delays to the Work attributable to any such cost reduction proposal. D. Contractor shall continue to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract until an executed Change Order, incorporating the cost reduction proposal has been issued. If an executed Change Order has not been issued by the date indicated in the Contractor's cost reduction proposal, or such other date as the Contractor may subsequently have specified in writing, such cost reduction proposal shall be deemed rejected. E. Engineer shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of a cost reduction proposal and of the estimated net savings in construction costs from the adoption of all or any part of such proposal. In determining the estimated net savings, Engineer reserves the right to disregard Contract bid prices if, in the judgment of Engineer, such prices do not represent a fair measure of the value of the work to be performed or deleted. F. Engineer reserves the right to require Contractor to share in Owner's costs of investigating a cost reduction proposal submitted by Contractor. Where such condition is imposed, Contractor shall indicate acceptance in writing, and such acceptance shall constitute full authority for Engineer to deduct amounts payable to Contractor from any monies due Contractor under the Contract. G. If Contractor's cost reduction proposal is accepted in whole or in part, such acceptance will be by a Contract Change Order. The Change Order shall specifically state that it is executed pursuant to this section. Such Change Order will incorporate the changes in the Contract Documents which are necessary to implement the cost reduction proposal, and shall include any conditions upon which the Engineer's approval is based. The Change Order shall set forth the estimated net savings in the cost of performing the work attributable to the cost reduction proposal, and shall further provide that the Contract cost be adjusted by crediting the Owner with 50% of the net cost savings. The amount specified to accrue to the Contractor in the Change Order for a cost reduction proposal shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for all work associated with the cost reduction proposal. November 2010 00800 -24 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions H. Acceptance of the cost reduction proposal and performance of the work thereunder shall not extend the time of the Contract unless specifically provided for in the Contract Change Order incorporating the cost reduction proposal. I. Owner expressly reserves the right to adopt a cost reduction proposal for general use on contracts administered by the Owner when it determines that the cost reduction proposal is suitable for application to other contracts. When an accepted cost reduction proposal is adopted for general use, only Contractor who first submitted such proposal will be eligible for compensation, and only to those contracts awarded to Contractor prior to submission of the accepted cost reduction proposal. Cost reduction proposals similar or identical to previously submitted proposals will be eligible for consideration and compensation if the previously submitted cost proposal was not adopted for general application. Owner or any other public agency shall have the right to use all or any part of a cost reduction proposal without obligation or compensation of any kind to Contractor. J. Contractor shall bear all costs to revise all bonds for the Project to include the cost reduction incentive proposal work. SC- 11.01.A.1— Delete Paragraph 11.01.A.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. Labor costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work will be the actual cost for wages in accordance with the Oregon Bureau of Labor and Industries (BOLI) Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon for each craft or type of workers performing the Work at the time the work is done, plus BOLI's established Fringe Rate for employer payments of payroll taxes, worker compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs resulting from Federal, State or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers will be paid only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor costs for foremen and superintendents shall be proportioned to all of their assigned work and only that applicable to extra work shall be paid. SC- 11.01.A.4 — In Paragraph 11.01.A.4, delete the word "special" and replace with the word "technical" and delete the parenthetical phrase "(including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants)" in its entirety. • • • • • • • • • November 2010 00800 -25 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC 11.01.A.5.c — Delete Paragraph 11.01.A.5.c and replace with the following: c. Rentals of construction equipment at the rental rate listed for such equipment specified in the current edition of the "Contractor's Equipment Cost Guide" as published by Equipment Watch (www.equipmentwatch.com), telephone number 800/699 -3282, or from rate sheets from local rental companies. Such rental rate will be used to compute payments for equipment whether the equipment is under the Contractor's control through direct ownership, leasing, renting, or another method of acquisition. The rental rate to be applied for use of each item of equipment will be the rate resulting in the least total cost to the Owner for the total period of use. If it is deemed necessary by the Contractor to use the equipment not listed by the references specified herein, an equitable rental rate for the equipment will be established by the Engineer. The Contractor may furnish cost data which might assist the Engineer in the establishment of the rental rate. Payment shall be subject to the following: 1) Payment for equipment which is already on the Project Site and which is used in the completion of extra work will not be allowed; 2) All equipment shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, be in good working condition and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be used; 3) Before construction equipment is used on the extra work, the Contractor shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number thereon at a conspicuous location, and shall furnish to the Engineer, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its identifying number; 4) Unless otherwise specified, manufacturer's ratings and manufacturer approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment for the determination of applicable rental rates. Equipment which has no direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer; 5) Individual pieces of equipment or tools having a replacement value of $500 or less, whether or not consumed by use, will be considered to be small tools and no payment will be made therefore; and 6) Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. The rental time to be paid for equipment at the Site will be the time the equipment is in productive operation on the extra work being performed and, in addition, will include the time required to move the equipment to the location of the extra work and return it to the original location or to another location; except, that moving time will not be paid if the equipment is used on other than the extra work, even though located at the site of the extra work. Loading and transporting costs will be allowed, in lieu of moving time, when the equipment is moved by means other than its own power, except that no payment will be made for loading and transporting costs when the equipment is used at the site of the extra work on other than the extra work. Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns. The rental time of equipment on the Work Site will be computed subject to the following: November 2010 00800 -26 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • 1) When hourly rates are listed, any part of an hour less than 30 minutes of operation will be considered to be half -hour of operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 30 minutes will be considered one hour of operation; 2) When daily rates are listed, any part of a day less than 4 hours operation will be considered to be half -day of operation. When Owner- operated equipment is used to perform extra work to be paid from on time and materials basis, Contractor will be paid for the equipment and operator, as set forth in Paragraphs a), b) and c) following; a) Payment for the equipment will be made in accordance with the provisions in Paragraph c above; b) Payment for the cost of labor and subsistence or travel allowance will be made at the rates established in Paragraphs SC- 11.01.A.1; and c) To the direct cost of equipment rental and labor, computed as provided herein, will be added the allowances for equipment rental and labor as provided in Section 00700 — Paragraph 12.01.C. SC- 11.01.B.5 — Insert the words ", including lost opportunity costs" between the words "kind" and "and" in the second line. Delete the "s" on "Paragraphs" in this same paragraph. SC-11.01.D — Add the following to Paragraph 11.01.D: Supporting data shall include but not be limited to daily submissions of timesheets indicating hours and trades worked, equipment and time equipment was employed, and materials expended. SC- 11.03.D — Delete Paragraph 11.03.D in its entirety. SC- 12.01.C.2.c — Add the following to Paragraph 12.01.C.2.c immediately following the word "Subcontractor" at the end of this Paragraph: except, the maximum total allowable cost to Owner shall be the Cost of the Work plus a maximum collective aggregate fee for Contractor and all tiered Subcontractors of 26.8 percent SC- 12.02.B — Add the following to Paragraph 12.02.B: All requests for time extensions shall be supported by Schedule analysis showing the effect on the entire Project taking into account concurrent Work and the critical path, including float. Partial demonstration of impact on particular operations only will not be acceptable to show the criticality of any event on the Project Schedule as a whole. November 2010 00800 -27 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC - 12.02 — Add the following paragraphs to 12.02 immediately following Paragraph 12.02B: C. Use of Float: 1. A claim for an adjustment of Contract Times (or Milestones), otherwise allowable under the Contract Documents, shall be granted only when the time lost or gained exceeds the float for the activity at the time of the event giving rise to the claim. Float, the amount of time between the early start date and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, is jointly owned by both Owner and Contractor whether expressly disclosed or implied in any manner. 2. Contractor shall not use float suppression techniques (including, but not limited to, preferential sequencing caused by late starts of follow -up trades, unreasonably small crews, extended durations, or imposed dates) in information provided to Engineer. SC 12.03.0 — Add the following after the first sentence of Paragraph 12.03.C: Contract Times may be extended because of delays in the completion of the Work due to abnormal weather conditions provided that the Contractor shall, within 10 days of the beginning of such delay, notify Engineer in writing of the cause of the delay and request an extension of time. Such requests shall be accompanied with supporting documentation referenced to the NOAA INDEX weather in the Project vicinity. Engineer will make recommendations to Owner to extend the Contract Times for completing the Work when, in Engineer's judgment, the findings of facts and extent of delay justify such an extension. Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation of any kind arising out of or relating to abnormal weather conditions. SC 12.03.E — Add the following paragraph immediately after Paragraph 1 2.03.E: F. Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Final Completion within the Contract Time. If Contractor's performance falls behind schedule, the Contractor shall accelerate the Work as required to get back on schedule at no additional cost to the Owner. Accelerated work shall include air or express delivery of materials and equipment, increasing the number of workers, working overtime, working Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays and working additional shifts. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for any extra cost of inspection made necessary by accelerated work required under this provision. SC 13.03.A — Delete Paragraph 13.03.A in its entirety and replace with the following: A. Contractor shall notify Engineer 48 hours prior to the expected time for operations requiring inspection and laboratory testing services. Contractor shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. SC 13.03.B — In the first line of Paragraph 13.03.B insert the words, "perform testing and inspections itself or shall" between the words "shall" and "employ ". SC 13.03.B.2 — Delete the word "and" at the end of this paragraph. November 2010 00800 -28 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions SC- 13.03.B.3 — Change Paragraph "3" to "4" and add the following paragraph: 3. retesting required because of non - conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents; and SC- 13.03.D — Add the following to Paragraph 13.03.D: Tests required by Contract Documents to be performed by Contractor that require test certificates be submitted to Owner or Engineer for acceptance shall be made by an independent testing laboratory or agency licensed or certified in accordance with Laws and Regulations and applicable state and local statutes. In the event state license or certification is not required, testing laboratories or agencies shall meet the following applicable requirements: 1. "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories. 2. Basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and /or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction" as applicable. 3. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either the National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. Prior to requesting a certificate of Substantial Completion, and allowing occupancy of facilities, Contractor shall provide an inspection by a state industrial safety representative, an independent safety inspector certified by the state, or a federal or state (OSHA) representative qualified in the construction type being inspected, to determine that the facilities provided are in compliance with the state and federal safety requirements. Signed copies of the inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engineer for Owner's files. Violations or deficiencies noted therein shall be resolved prior to occupancy of the facilities and before final payment will be made. SC -13.03 — Add the following paragraph after Paragraph 13.03.F: G. Costs of retesting as required in accordance with Paragraph 13.03.B.3 shall be paid by the Contractor. SC 14.02.A.1 — In the first sentence, delete the phrase "date established in the Agreement for each progress payment" and replace it with the phrase "first day of each month ". Add the following immediately following Paragraph 14.02.A.1: a. Stored Materials and Equipment: Payments for stored materials and equipment shall be based only upon the actual cost of the materials and equipment to Contractor and shall not include any overhead or profit to Contractor. Partial payments will not be made for undelivered materials or equipment, except for payments associated with procurement contracts initiated by Owner and assigned to Contractor. November 2010 00800 -29 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions b. Schedules and Data: During the progress of the Work, each Application for Payment shall be accompanied by Contractor's updated schedule of operations, or progress report, with the shop drawings schedules, procurement schedules, and value of material on hand included in the application, and other data specified in Section 01330 or reasonably required by Engineer. c. Payment for material delivered to the Work Site or stored under Owner's control will be based on the vendors' paid invoices or the bill of lading showing date of delivery and the Work Site where the delivery took place, a copy of which shall be furnished by Contractor to Engineer with each request for progress payment. Only those materials which have been incorporated into the Project or are stored under Owner's control may be included in the progress payment as material stored. d. In addition to the amounts which Owner may retain as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Owner may withhold a sufficient amount or amounts from any payment otherwise due Contractor as in Owner's judgment may be necessary to cover: 1) Payments which may be due and payable for properly filed claims against Contractor or any Subcontractor for labor or materials furnished in or about the performance of the Contract. 2) Estimated or actual costs for correcting defective work not remedied. 3) Amounts claimed by Owner as forfeiture due to delays or other offsets. Owner may apply such withheld amount or amounts to the payment of such claim at Owner's discretion. In doing so, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payments so made by Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for such payment made in good faith. Such payments may be made without prior judicial determination of the claim or claims. Owner shall render to Contractor a proper account of any such funds disbursed in or on behalf of Contractor. SC 14.02.B.1 — In the first line of Paragraph 14.02.B.1, change the number "10" to the number "15". SC — Delete Paragraph 14.02.C.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: 1. Thirty days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Engineer or fifteen days after approval of Application for Payment by Owner, whichever comes first, the amount • recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. The Engineer shall have fifteen days from receipt of Application for Payment to notify Contractor if all or part of the Application for Payment is in dispute. SC 14.02.D — Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1 as follows: Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1.c by removing the "or ". Modify Paragraph 14.02.D.1.d by removing the "." and replacing it with "; or ". November 2010 00800 -30 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions Add the following paragraph immediately after 14.02.D.1.d: e. Owner has not received the Certified Payrolls from Contractor required by Article 11 of the Agreement and must withhold the additional retainage required in Article 11 of the Agreement until Contractor submits its Certified Payrolls. SC 14.02.D.2 - Delete Paragraph 14.02.D.2 and replace it with the following paragraph: 2. Owner may reduce the amount recommended by Engineer and to be paid for the following items: a. Owner compensation to Engineer for labor plus expenses because of the following Contractor - caused events: i. witnessing retesting of corrected or replaced defective Work; ii. return visits to manufacturing facilities to witness factory testing or retesting; iii. Submittal review in excess of two reviews by Engineer for substantially the same Submittal; iv. evaluation of proposed substitutions and in making changes to Contract Documents occasioned thereby; or b. liability for liquidated damages incurred by Contractor as set forth in the Agreement. • SC 14.02.D.3 — Renumber existing Paragraph 14.02.D.3 to become Paragraph 14.02.D.4. and • insert the following paragraph for 14.02.D.3: • If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will • give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such • action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto • agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons • for such action. • SC 14.04.A — Add the following to Paragraph 14.04.A: • • Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completion of the Project's • operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner the full time, uninterrupted, and • continuous beneficial operation of the Work; (ii) all required functional, performance and acceptance or startup testing has been successfully demonstrated for all components, devices, • equipment, and instrumentation and control to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with • the requirements of the Specifications; (iii) all inspections required have been completed and • identified critical defective Work has been replaced or corrected; and (iv) all appurtenant operations and maintenance features (e.g., hose bibs, drainage systems, etc.) and safety • features (e.g., handrails, motor guards, etc.) have been installed and are functional. • November 2010 00800 -31 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • SC 14.04.A — Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 14.04.A: 1. Conditions precedent to Substantial Completion of the Work and Engineer's issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion shall include: a. Conformance with all training services requirements and deliverables. b. Acceptance of all preliminary operation and maintenance manuals by Owner and Engineer. c. Submittal of current record documents to Owner and Engineer. d. Correction of all state, local, and other regulatory agencies defective Work lists. e. Submittals have been received and approved by Engineer including, but not limited to, the following: i. Approved Shop Drawings. ii. Record Drawings and Specifications. iii. Electrical testing and wiring diagrams. iv. Equipment data forms. v. Manufacturer's certificates of proper installation. vi. Factory test reports. vii. Commissioning, testing and start-up reports. SC- 14.04.D — Delete the last sentence of Paragraph 14.04.D. • SC 14.07.A.2.a. — Change the reference to Paragraph "5.04.B.6" to "5.04.B "in this paragraph. SC — Add the following sentence after the second sentence of Paragraph 14.07.B.1: • • Such written notice of acceptance of the Work shall constitute Final Completion. • • • • • • • • • November 2010 00800 -32 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • • SC -15.02 - Delete paragraphs 15.02.A through 15.02.D and insert the following in lieu thereof: A. If Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work or any separable part thereof with such diligence as will ensure the completion of the Work within the Contract Times, or any extension thereof, or fails or refuses to complete such Work within such extension, or if Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt, or if Contractor should make assignment for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or if Contractor files a petition to take advantage of any debtor's act, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency, or if Contractor or any Subcontractor should violate any provision of the Contract, or if Contractor should persistently refuse or should fail to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials to complete the Work in the time specified, or if Contractor should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor, or if Contractor should disregard laws, ordinances, or instructions given by Owner or Engineer or disregard in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; Owner may without prejudice to any other right or remedy, serve written notice upon Contractor and Contractor's surety of Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. Such notice will contain the reasons for Owner's intention to terminate the Contract and unless such violations shall cease and satisfactory arrangements for the corrections thereof have been accepted by Owner in writing within 10 days after the service of such notice, the Contract shall upon the expiration of said 10 days cease and terminate. In the event of such termination, the Owner shall immediately serve written notice upon the Surety and Contractor, and Contractor shall be liable for all costs necessary to complete the Work. • B. The Surety shall, after receipt of notification from Owner of termination of the Contract, take over and perform the Work, utilizing a Contractor which is acceptable • to Engineer. The Surety shall, within 10 days after receipt of the notice of termination, provide Owner with written notice of Surety's intent to take over and complete the • Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and shall commence the Work • within 10 days thereafter. • C. If the Surety does not reply to the notice of termination, or fails to perform the Work • in compliance with the Contract Documents, or provides the Owner with written • notice that Surety does not intend to take over and perform the Work to completion, • Owner may without prejudice on the part of the Surety, take over the Work and prosecute the same to completion by any method Owner may deem advisable for the • Project at the expense of Contractor, and the Surety shall be liable to Owner for any • excess cost incurred by or other damage to Owner. In such event Owner may, without • liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing the Work such materials, appliances, plant, and other property belonging to Contractor that may be on • the Work Sites and be necessary therefore. Contractor shall turn over to Owner's • Operating Agent all materials and equipment in Contractor's possession that is to be • incorporated into the Project, and shall make arrangements with Owner to turn over • any materials or. equipment in which Owner has made payment or partial payment but is not in Owner's possession. • • • November 2010 00800 -33 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • D. Upon completion of the Work, if the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect cost of completing the Work, including, but not limited to, all costs incurred by Owner from professional services and attorneys' fees and all costs generated to insure or bond the Work of substitute contractors or Subcontractors used to complete the Work, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner within 30 days upon demand; on failure of Contractor to pay, the Surety shall promptly pay the difference to Owner upon written notice of Contractor's failure to pay. Such difference or any portion thereof not paid by Contractor or the Surety within the 30 days following the date of mailing of the demand for payment, shall earn interest at the rate of 10 percent per annum or the maximum rate authorized by state law, whichever is lower. SC -15.04 — Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate: Delete paragraph 15.04 in its entirety. SC -16.01 — Delete Paragraph 16.01 in its entirety and replace with the following Paragraphs 16.01 and 16.02: 16.01 Executive Negotiation A. Within 10 days of the delivery of notice of appeal to Engineer's written decision regarding Claim, dispute or other matter, senior representatives of at least Owner and Contractor, having authority to settle the dispute, and Engineer shall meet at a mutually acceptable time and place, and thereafter as often as they reasonably deem necessary, to exchange relevant information and to attempt to resolve the dispute. B. In the event a mutually acceptable decision cannot be reached through executive negotiation within 20 days of the appealing party's notice, or mutually agreeable longer period, or if the party receiving such notice will not meet within 10 days, Owner or Contractor may make a written declaration, delivered to the other party and Engineer, that the executive • negotiation is deemed unsuccessful and may initiate further dispute resolution measures in accordance with this Article 16. • • 16.02 Mediation, Followed by Binding Arbitration: • A. All appealed or unsettled Claims, disputes or other matters between Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, (except • for Claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided • by paragraph 14.09) shall first be submitted to mediation under the Construction Industry • Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the limitations of Article 16. The mediator of any Claim, dispute or other matter submitted to • mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such Claim, dispute, or other • matter unless otherwise agreed. • • • • • November 2010 00800 -34 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • B. Should the mediation be unsuccessful, such Claim, dispute or other matter (except for Claims which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment as provided by Paragraph 14.09) shall be decided by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining subject to the limitations of this Article 16. The mediator of any Claim, dispute or other matter submitted to mediation under this Agreement shall not serve as arbitrator of such Claim, dispute, or other matter unless otherwise agreed. C. This Agreement so to mediate or to arbitrate and any other agreement or consent to mediate or to arbitrate entered into accordance with these Contract Documents will be specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction. D. No demand for mediation or arbitration of any appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter that is required to be referred to Engineer initially for decision in accordance with Paragraph 9.08 will be made later than 10 days after the date the executive negotiation has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor; and the failure to demand mediation or arbitration within said 10 days' period will result in Engineer's decision being final and binding upon Owner and Contractor. If Engineer renders a further decision after mediation or arbitration proceedings have been initiated, the decision may be entered as evidence but will not supersede the proceedings, except where the decision is acceptable to the parties concerned. Time deadlines specified above apply to both mediation (after the executive negotiation has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor) and arbitration (after the mediation process has been declared unsuccessful by Owner or Contractor). • E. Notice of the demand for mediation or arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Agreement and with the American Arbitration Association, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for information. The demand for mediation or arbitration will be made within the 10 day periods specified in Paragraph 16.02.D as applicable, and in all other cases • within a reasonable time after the unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter has arisen, and in no event shall any such demand be made after the date when institution of legal or equitable • . proceedings based on such unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter would be barred by the • applicable statute of limitations. • F. Except as provided in Paragraphs 16.02.G and H below, no arbitration arising out of or • relating to the Contract Documents shall include by consolidation, joinder or in any other • manner any other person or entity who is not a party to the Contract unless: • 1. the inclusion of such other person or entity is necessary if complete relief is to be • afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitrations, and • • 2. such other person or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact which • is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration and which will arise in such proceedings, and • • • • • November 2010 00800 -35 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • 3. the written consent of the other person or entity sought to be included and the Owner and Contractor has been obtained for such inclusion, which consent shall make specific reference to this paragraph; but no such consent shall constitute consent to arbitration of any appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter not specifically described in such consent or to arbitration with any party not specifically identified in such consent. G. Notwithstanding Paragraph 16.02.F, if an appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter between Owner and Contractor involves any allegations relating to the design, Owner may join Engineer as a party to the mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor hereunder. H. Notwithstanding Paragraph 16.02.F, if an appealed or unsettled Claim, dispute or other matter between Owner and Contractor involves the Work of a Subcontractor, either Owner or Contractor may join such Subcontractor as a party to the mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor hereunder. Contractor shall include in all subcontracts required by Paragraph 6.06.G of the General Conditions a specific provision whereby the Subcontractor consents to being joined in mediation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor involving the Work of such Subcontractor. Nothing in this Paragraph 16.02.H nor in the provision of such subcontract consenting to joinder shall create any Claim, right or cause of action in favor of Subcontractor and against Owner, Engineer or Engineer's Consultants that does not otherwise exist. I. The results of successful mediation will be implemented by a Change Order. The award rendered by the arbitrators will be final, judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction thereof, and will not be subject to modification or appeal. SC ARTICLE 17 — Add the following paragraphs to ARTICLE 17 — MISCELLANEOUS: 17.07 Forney Fees A. At the conclusion of the mediation process specified herein, the Contractor will, as a condition of taking any further action with respect to any Claim, be required to certify that the • amount of the Claim is its best good faith estimate of the amount due ( "Certified Claim "). • Owner will certify its final offer of settlement ( "Final Offer "). In the event Contractor pursues • the Claim, Contractor will be entitled, in addition to whatever recovery it has on the Claim, to be reimbursed its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in the same proportion it was successful • based on the difference between its Certified Claim compared to the Owner's Final Offer. • Conversely, Owner will be entitled to be reimbursed its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in • proportion to the amount that Contractor was unsuccessful based on the difference between its Certified Claim compared to the Owner's Final Offer. For example, if Contractor recovers • 40% of the difference between its Certified Claim and the amount of the Owner's Final Offer, S Contractor would be entitled to recover 40% of its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in the • prosecuting the Claim and the Owner would be entitled to recover 60% of its reasonable attorney's fees incurred in defending the Claim. On the other hand, if the Contractor recovers • 60% of the difference between its Certified Claim and the amount of the Owner's Final Offer, • Contractor would be entitled to recover 60% of its reasonable attorney's fees in prosecuting • the Claim and the Owner would be entitled to recover 40% of its reasonable attorney's fess • November 2010 00800 -36 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • incurred in defending the Claim. The Certified Claim and the Final Offer will be admissible in any dispute resolution proceeding. 17.08 Right To Audit A. If the Contractor submits a Claim to the Owner for additional compensation, the Owner shall have the right, as a condition to considering the Claim, and as a basis for evaluation of the Claim, and until the Claim has been settled, to audit the Contractor's books to the extent they are relevant. This right shall include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify all direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or anticipated to be incurred and for which the Claim has been submitted. The right to audit shall include the right to inspect the Contractor's plant, or such parts thereof, as may be or have been engaged in the performance of the Work. The Contractor further agrees that the right to audit encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon Subcontractors. The rights to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be exercisable through such representatives as the Owner deems desirable during the Contractor's normal business hours at the office of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make available to the Owner for auditing, all relevant accounting records and documents, and other financial data, and upon request, shall submit true copies of requested records to the Owner. END OF SECTION • • • • • • • • • • • November 2010 00800 -37 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Supplementary Conditions • EXHIBIT A CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO: TO CONTRACTOR PROJECT: DURHAM AWWTF AB4 PROJECT 6446 MISCELLANEOUS IMPROVEMENTS NO. OWNER: CLEAN WATER SERVICES ENGINEER: The following change(s) to the Contract ai•e hereby ordered (use additional pages if required): Attachments (List Supporting Documents): Changes to Contract Amount and . Contract Times: The stipulated compensation (Contract Price or Contract Times, or both) set forth in this Change Order includes payment for (i) the Cost of the Work covered by the Change Order, (ii) • CONTRACTOR's fee for overhead and profit, (iii) interruption of progress schedules, (iv) delay and impact, including cumulative impact, on other Work under the Contract Documents, and (v) extended overheads. This Change Order constitutes full mutual accord and satisfaction for the change to the Work. • No reservation of rights to pursue subsequent claims on the Change Order will be made by either • party. • No subsequent claim or amendment of the Contract Documents will arise out of or as a result of • this Change Order. In executing this Change Order, Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner and Engineer • and their officers, agents, and employees from any and all claims of any kind by any subcontractor • or supplier of any tier based upon the subject matter of any claim released hereunder by Contractor. • Except as otherwise provided in this Change Order, the Contract, as amended, between Owner and • Contractor, remains in full force and effect. • Contract Amount Contract Times (Calculate Days) • Original Amount: Original Duration: Days • Previous Contract Change Previous Contract Change Days • • Orders: Orders: • This Contract Change This Contract Change Order: Days • Order: • • • Revised Contract Amount: Revised Contract Time: Days The Revised Contract Completion Date is: 20 This Change Order is Issued in Accordance with Paragraph SC — 10.01.A of the Supplementary Conditions Owner Contractor Engineer Recommendation By: By: By: Date: Date: Date: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • SECTION 00810 OREGON PREVAILING WAGE RATES • :• The applicable Oregon minimum prevailing wage rates are contained in the publication July 1, 2010 Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts in Oregon effective July 1, 2010, as amended by the October 1, 2010 Amendment, (see links at http: / /www.oreaon.gov /boli /whd /pwr /pwr state.shtml), available at http: / /www.oregon.gov /boli, and are incorporated herein as though fully set forth as of the date these Bidding Documents were first advertised. • • • • • • • November 2010 00810-1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Oregon Prevailing Wage Rates • • (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL }9 • • 0 • • • • • • • • 0 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 The WORK covered under this Contract will be performed at the site of the Clean Water Services' Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility, 16580 SW 85th Avenue, Tigard, Oregon 97224. PART 2 DESCRIPTION OF OWNER'S PROJECT 2.01 The provision of labor, materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the following WORK in Aeration Basin 4: modifying the existing concrete baffle wall between cells 4/5; installing a new concrete baffle wall between cells 5/6; removing the gates and filling the channel between cells 4/5 and 7 with concrete; removing the gates and filling the channel north of cell 7 with concrete; dissolved oxygen (DO) monitoring and control improvements; installation of a manually actuated slide gate in the channel at the southeast corner of cell 3; and installation of additional aeration diffusers in cell 5. The Project also includes repairs to the non - potable water (NPW) system around Secondary Clarifier No. 3 and Secondary Clarifier No. 4. A. The WORK is a public works project. Contractor and any subcontractors shall abide by ORS 279C.800 to 279C.870 that relate to the prevailing wage rates for the building and construction trades in the State of Oregon. B. Along with any subcontractors performing WORK, Contractor shall pay Workers in each trade or occupation required for the WORK not less than the applicable Oregon prevailing rate of wage in accordance with ORS 279C.838 and 279C.840. The minimum prevailing wage rates contained in July 1, 2010 Prevailing Wage Rates For Public Works Contracts in Oregon dated July 1, 2010 (see links at http:// www. oregon. gov /boli /whd /pwr /pwr_state.shtml), and are hereby incorporated herein as of the date these Bidding Documents were first advertised. The applicable Oregon prevailing wage rates for such workers are incorporated by reference in Section 00810. Contractor shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to comply with this provision. Contractor shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to comply with this provision. C. Contractor shall have a public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). Contractor shall also include in every subcontract a provision requiring the subcontractor to have a • public works bond filed with the Construction Contractors Board before starting • work on the project unless exempt under ORS 279C.836(4), (7), (8) or (9). • D. Owner will be responsible for paying the fee required by ORS 279C.825 to the • Commissioner of the Bureau of Labor and Industries. • • November 2010 01010 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Summary of Work • E. "OR EQUAL" CLAUSE In order to establish a basis of quality, certain processes, types of machinery and equipment or kinds of material may be specified on the plans or herein by designating a manufacturer's name and referring to brand or product designation. It is not the intent of these specifications to exclude other processes, equipment or materials of a type and quality equal to those designated. When a manufacturer's name, brand or item designation is given, it shall be understood that the words "or equal" follow such name or designation, whether in fact they do so or not. If Contractor desires to furnish items of equipment by manufacturers other than those specified, he shall secure the approval of Engineer prior to placing a purchase order. No extras will be allowed to the Contractor for any changes required to adopt the substitute equipment. Therefore, Contractor's proposal for an alternate shall include all costs for any modifications to the plans, such as structural and foundation changes, additional piping or changes in piping, electrical changes or any other modifications which may be necessary or required for approval and adoption of the proposed alternate equipment. Approval of alternate equipment by Engineer before or after bidding does not guarantee or imply that the alternate equipment will fit the design without modifications. END OF SECTION • November 2010 01010 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Summary of Work • • SECTION 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS PART 1 - CONTINUTTY OF PLANT OPERATIONS 1.01 GENERAL A. The Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility (AWWTF) continuously receives and treats sewage, and this function shall not be interrupted except as specified herein. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work to avoid any interference with normal operation of AWWTF equipment and processes. 1.02 PERMIT VIOLATIONS A. The Durham AWWTF must continuously be in compliance with its National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit requirements. In the event permit violations are caused or, in the OWNER's opinion, will be caused by the CON1'RACTOR's operations, the OWNER shall immediately be entitled to employ others to stop the violations without giving written notice to the CONTRACTOR B. Penalties imposed on and costs incurred by the OWNER as a result of any violations caused by the actions of the CONTRACTOR, his employees, or subcontractors, shall be borne in full by the CONTRACTOR, including legal fees and other expenses to the OWNER resulting directly or indirectly from the violation. Under the terms of discharge permits issued to the OWNER, the OWNER is liable for the following penalties: 1. NPDES Permit No. 101141 $ 10,000 per day for each violation 1.03 ACCESS • A. Normal working hours at the AWWTF are 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. The CONTRACTOR shall have access to Aeration Basin 4 during these • hours except as listed herein or unless otherwise arranged with and approved by the OWNER CONTRACTOR shall not shutdown any power without receiving prior • approval from OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall observe and comply with all loading • limits for structures and roadways posted at the site. Specific areas of concern • include the aeration basin tunnel, RAS pump station roof, Electric Substation roof, and as noted on the drawings. • • PART 2 - WORK SEQUENCE • 2.01 Work shall be performed to ensure that the AWWTF is continuously operational. • However, it will be necessary to take Aeration Basin 4 and associated channels out of • service, and drain the aeration basin and associated channels. The treatment capacity of the AWWTF is significantly reduced when any portion of Train 4 is out of service. • Therefore, Aeration Basin 4 can be taken out of service to perform work under this • Contract only beginning March 1, 2011. To ensure continued permit compliance, Work '• November 2010 01014 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements l i 517- 03 -09 -24 Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints • requiring Aeration Basin 4 to be out of service shall be completed within 45 calendar days from March 1, 2011 and the basin turned back over to the Owner so that it may be placed back into service. OWNER will take Aeration Basin 4 out of service only as described in this section. 2.02 The OWNER anticipates that this work will be completed within the specified duration. However, the OWNER may elect to postpone the work up to one month. If OWNER elects to postpone the work, there will not be a corresponding change to project duration. The OWNER will give CONTRACTOR a minimum of one -week notice if the OWNER elects to postpone the work. 2.03 OWNER's operations personnel will drain the Aeration Basin and associated channels of wastewater. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning concrete surfaces of the aeration basin and channels to prepare these surfaces for the new work, including achieving adequate bonding of new concrete to existing concrete and for placement of diffuser piping supports. 2.04 CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposed work sequence to OWNER within 1 week of issuance of Notice to Proceed. The proposed work sequence shall be prepared using the critical path method and shall depict a detailed sequence of tasks and required shutdowns. The dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established what effect the progress of any one activity has on the schedule. The critical path shall be shown. Completion time shall be shown on the schedule. Two copies of the schedule shall be provided. 2.05 The work sequence submittal shall detail the proposed types, weights, and locations of • vehicles and equipment used to lift the materials and equipment necessary for this project. • A. CONTRACTOR should expect to dispose of up to 20 cubic yards of debris from the • basin and channels. Debris may be disposed of in OWNER's dumpster located in • the Headworks. • • • • • • • • • • • • • November 2010 01014 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints • • PART 3 - SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS 3.01 The schedule constraints are listed in the above work sequence and are summarized below. Target Date and/or Duration Milestone in Calendar Days Work requiring channels and Cells 1 -7 of 45 days from Notice to Proceed with Work on this Item, which Aeration Basin 4 to be out of service will not be issued until March 1, 2011 Substantial Completion 145 days from Date of Notice to Proceed (NTP) Final Completion 160 days from Date of Notice to Proceed (NTP) A. A failure to comply with the duration requirements of any of the above milestones, or the substantial completion or final completion dates shall result in the assessment of liquidated damages in accordance with the Agreement. END OF SECTION • • • • r • • • • • • • • • • • November 2010 01014 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • SECTION 01060 SAFETY AND HEALTH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 The CONTRACTOR assumes full responsibility for safety for all work related to the Contract Documents. Portions of the existing plant are exposed to wastewaters of varying degrees of treatment. By submitting a bid, the CONTRACTOR shall be experienced and qualified to anticipate and meet the safety and health requirements of this project. 1.02 Workers involved in the removal, renovation, or installation of equipment within the treatment plant may be exposed to disease - producing organisms in wastewater. The CONTRACTOR shall require his personnel to observe proper hygienic precautions. 1.03 Solvents, gasoline, and other hazardous materials enter the plant with incoming sewage, and, therefore, certain areas are hazardous to open flame, sparks, or unventilated occupancy. The CON TRACTOR shall take measures to assure his personnel observe proper safety precautions when working in these areas. • PART 2 - SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS 2.01 The CONTRACTOR shall comply with Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, • promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and • Safety Standards Act, as set forth in Title 29, C.F.R. Copies of these regulations may be • obtained from Labor Building, 14th and Constitution Avenue N.W., Washington, DC • 20013. 2.02 The CONTRACTOR shall also comply with the provisions of the Federal Occupational • Safety and Health Act, as amended. 2.03 Additional safety regulations are listed in Section 00800. • • PART 3 - CONSTRUCTION SAFETY PLAN • 3.01 CONTRACTOR shall prepare a construction safety plan, which details the methods and • procedures to comply with State, Federal, and local health and safety laws, rules and requirements for the duration of the Contract Time. The plan shall include the following at • a minimum: A. Procedures for providing workers with an awareness of safety and health hazards expected to be encountered in the course of construction. B. Safety equipment appropriate to the safety and health hazards expected to be • encountered during construction. Include warning devices, barricades, safety equipment in public right -of -way and protected areas, and safety equipment used in • multi -level structures. • C. Methods for minimizing employees' exposure to safety and health hazards expected • during construction. • November 2010 01060 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Safety and Health • D. Procedures for reporting safety or health hazards. E. Procedures to correct and follow -up on a recognized safety and health hazard. F. Procedures for investigation of accidents, injuries, illnesses and unusual events that have occurred at the construction site. G. Periodic and scheduled inspections of general work areas and specific workstations. H. Training for employees and workers at the job site, including at a minimum: 1. General Safety Rules, including reporting of Unsafe Conditions 2. Hazard Communication & chemical safety 3. Lockout - Tagout 4. Electrical Safety 5. Evacuation Routes, Alarms & Procedures 6. Hot Work Program 7. Confined Space Program 8. Process Safety Management 9. Personal Protective Equipment I. Methods of communication of safe working conditions, work practices and required personal protection equipment. • 3.02 CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility for every aspect of Health and Safety on the job site, including the health and safety of Subcontractors, suppliers, and other persons on • the job site. • 3.03 CONTRACTOR shall transmit to OWNER copies of reports and other documents related • to accidents or injuries encountered during construction. • 3.04 To ensure the safety of CONTRACTOR and employees, facilities and equipment, the • CONTRACTOR shall conduct comprehensive pre -work safety review conference with • employees for all CONTRACTOR work that involves: • A. Construction • B. Renovation • C. Equipment installation & repair • D. Utility modifications E. Electrical work F. Work at elevated locations • G. Confined space entry H. Use of toxic substances • I. Hot work or welding • • • • November 2010 01060 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Safety and Health • 41 3.05 As a minimum, the safety review participants will consist of a CONTRACTOR safety representative. All task specific safety concerns shall be addressed and resolved prior to commencement of work by the CONTRACTOR. 3.06 The CONTRACTOR shall also provide to the Construction Manger a listing of all hazardous chemicals with applicable Material Safety Data Sheets that will be used on the job site. 3.07 Work within the aeration basins, channels and clarifiers will involve permit- required confined space entry. Entry is allowed only through a permitted space program developed by the CONTRACTOR that meets the requirements of OAR 437 -2 /J (29 CFR 1910.146). 3.08 CONTRACTOR may encounter slip, fall, and engulfment hazards. OWNER will provide information regarding precautions and protective measures established within the plant prior to CONTRACTOR commencing work. CONTRACTOR shall inform OWNER of the employee protection procedures that will be used, shall utilize employees trained in safe practices, and shall instruct employees as to the specific potential hazards of this project. CONTRACTOR shall maintain records as to training and enforcement procedures that assure that safe practices are followed. 3.09 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all necessary safety equipment. END OF SECTION November 2010 01060 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Safety and Health (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 • SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers' information, shop drawings, test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, and miscellaneous work- related submittals. Submittals shall also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment and systems, materials, reinforcing steel, fabricated items, and piping and conduit details. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certificates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer's installation and other instructions as specifically required in the contract documents to demonstrate fully that the materials and equipment to be furnished and the methods of work comply with the provisions and intent of the contract documents. 1.02 The OWNER's cost of review of submittals for the same proposed materials, equipment or work shall be apportioned as follows: (1) the cost of review of the initial submittal and the first revised submittal shall be borne by the OWNER; and (2) the cost of all additional revised submittals shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR. The cost of review shall include, without limitation, administrative, design and engineering activities directly related to review of submittals. 1.03 If a submittal requires further engineering or re- design efforts on the part of the OWNER, the cost of such efforts shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR; provided, the CONTRACTOR shall not be charged for such efforts if implementation of the submittal results in savings to the OWNER greater than the cost of such efforts. PART 2 — CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 2.01 The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that all features of all products conform to the specified requirements. Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or series of equipment, which are being submitted for review. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the ENGINEER in each case where his submittal may affect the work of another CONTRACTOR or the OWNER The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate submittals among his subcontractors and suppliers including those submittals complying with unit responsibility requirements specified in applicable technical sections. November 2010 01300 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Submittals 2.02 The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate submittals with the work so that work will not be delayed. He shall coordinate and schedule different categories of submittals, so that one will not be delayed for lack of coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly schedule submittals. The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work related to a submittal until the submittal process is complete. This requires that submittals for review and comment shall be returned to the CONTRACTOR stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted." 2.03 The CONTRACTOR shall certify on each submittal document that he has reviewed the submittal, verified field conditions, and complied with the contract documents. 2.04 The CONTRACTOR may authorize in writing a material or equipment supplier to deal directly with the ENGINEER or with the OWNER with regard to a submittal. These dealings shall be limited to contract interpretations to clarify and expedite the work. PART 3 — CATEGORY OF SUBMITTALS 3.01 GENERAL A. Submittals fall into two general categories; submittals for review and comment, and submittals, which are primarily for information only. 3.02 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT A. All submittals except where specified to be submitted as product data for information only shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER for review and comment. PART 4 — TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE • 4.01 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise specified, submittals regarding material and equipment shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01999 -2 specified in Section 01999. Submittals for operation and maintenance manuals, information and data shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01999 -2 specified in Section 01999. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which the submittal is required. Submittal documents . common to more than one piece of equipment shall be identified with all the appropriate equipment numbers. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer's package or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole. November 2010 01300 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Submittals B. A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompanying each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: "XXX "; where "XXX" is the sequential number assigned by the CONTRACTOR Resubmittals shall have the following format: "XXX -Y "; where "XXX" is the originally assigned submittal number and "Y" is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25. 4.02 DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT A. If the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide material, equipment, or method of work, which deviates from the project manual, he shall indicate so under "deviations" on the transmittal form accompanying the submittal copies. 4.03 SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS A. Submittals which do not have all the information required to be submitted, including deviations, are not acceptable and will be returned without review. PART 5 — REVIEW PROCEDURE 5.01 GENERAL A. Submittals are specified for those features and characteristics of materials, equipment, and methods of operation which can be selected based on the CONTRACTOR's judgment of their conformance to the specified requirements. Other features and characteristics are specified in a manner which enables the CONTRACTOR to determine acceptable options without submittals. The review procedure is based on the CONTRACTOR's guarantee that all features and characteristics not requiring submittals conform as specified. Review shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions, weights or gages, or fabrication processes (except where speci—fically indicated or required by the project manual) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Review of a separate item, as such, will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. When the contract documents require a submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the specified information as follows: 1. 4 copies of all submitted information plus one electronic file in PDF format of all information shall be transmitted with submittals for review and comment. 2. Unless otherwise specified, 3 copies of all submitted information shall be transmitted with submittals (product data) for information only. November 2010 01300 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Submittals 5.02 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND CONTENT A. Unless otherwise specified, within 15 calendar days after receipt of a submittal for review and comment, the ENGINEER shall review the submittal and return 2 copies of the marked -up submittal. One submittal copy original will be retained by the ENGINEER The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions: 1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work method complies with the project manual, submittal copies will be marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN." In this event, the CONTRACTOR may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal. 2. If the review indicates limited corrections are required, copies will be marked "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." The CONTRACTOR may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in O &M data, a corrected copy shall be provided. 3. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect data, copies will be marked "AMEND AND RESUBMIT." Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." 4. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method does not comply with the project manual, copies of the submittal will be marked "REJEC TED - SEE REMARKS." Submittals with deviations which have not been identified clearly may be rejected. Except at his own risk, the CONTRACTOR shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED." PART 6 — EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 6.01 Review of contract drawings, methods of work, or information regarding materials or equipment the CONTRACTOR proposes to provide, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the ENGINEER or the OWNER, or by any officer or employee thereof, and the CONTRACTOR shall have no claim under the contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" or "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" shall mean that the OWNER has no objection to the CONTRACTOR, upon his own responsibility, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed. END OF SECTION November 2010 01300 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Submittals SECTION 01500 CONTRACTOR'S FACILITIES AND UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STAGING AREA A. Before starting the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER a proposed plan and layout for all temporary offices, sanitary facilities, storage areas, temporary water service and distribution, and temporary power service and distribution. B. Staging shall be subject to the following restrictions: 1. On -site job trailers shall be located within the staging area shown on the drawings. 2. All privately owned vehicles shall be parked in areas designated by the OWNER and shall not interfere with construction or OWNER's operation of facilities. 3. Only materials and equipment related to construction shall be located on site. 1.02 NOT USED 1.03 WATER A. The CONTRACTOR may temporarily connect into the OWNER's non - potable water system. The water is not suitable for drinking. CONTRACTOR shall use the water in a non - wasteful manner. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of connecting into the water system and disconnecting from the system upon completion of work. OWNER shall not charge CONTRACTOR for use of water. 1.04 POWER A. The CONTRACTOR may temporarily connect into OWNER's electrical power system 120V service is available. CONTRACTOR shall use electrical power in a non - wasteful manner. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of connecting into OWNER's electrical power system and for the cost of disconnecting from the system upon completion of the work. OWNER shall continue to pay power bill and shall not charge CONTRACTOR for use of power. 1.05 TELEPHONE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cellular telephone service at the construction site. The CONTRACTOR shall not be permitted to use the OWNER's telephone service. November 2010 01500 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Contractor's Facilities and Utilities 1.06 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Toilet Facilities: The CONTRACTOR may use the OWNER's existing restroom in the Chemical Building Breezeway. CONTRACTOR shall clean this facility on a weekly basis and return to the original condition upon project completion. END OF SECTION November 2010 01500 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Contractor's Facilities and Utilities SECTION 01505 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 MOBILIZATION Mobilization shall consist of preparatory work and operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the site; for the establishment of all facilities necessary for work on the project; and for all other work and operations which must be performed, or costs incurred prior to beginning work, on the various items on the project site. Mobilization shall also include the construction of temporary ramps and access ways, temporary fencing, and the necessary preparatory work required to allow for the safe and stable movement of all vehicles that are required to construct the improvements as shown. 1.02 DEMOBILIZATION Demobilization shall consist of work and operations necessary to disband all mobilized items and clean up the site. The removal of all temporary ramps, access ways, signs, temporary fencing, and temporary facilities or works on the restoration of surfaces to an equal or better than existing condition shall also be included as part of demobilization. END OF SECTION November 2010 01505 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Mobilization and Demobilization (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 01560 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SITE MAINTENANCE A. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the work site, staging areas, and CON I'RACTOR's facilities clean and free from rubbish and debris. The CONTRACTOR's staging area is noted on the drawings. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site when they are no longer necessary. Equipment removed as part of demolition shall not be stored on site. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance, the work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish to present a clean and neat appearance. B. CLEAN -UP 1. Waste material of any kind will not be permitted to remain on the site of the work or on adjacent streets. Immediately upon such materials becoming unfit for use in the work, they shall be collected, carried off the site, and properly and legally disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide cleanup facilities for CONTRACTOR'S employees and keep these areas clear of all refuse, rubbish, and debris that may accumulate from any source and shall keep them in a neat condition to the satisfaction of the OWNER. 3. In the event that waste material, refuse, debris, and /or rubbish are not so removed from the work by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER reserves the right to have the waste material, refuse, debris and /or rubbish removed and the expense of the removal and disposal charged to the CONTRACTOR. 4. Paints, solvents, and other construction materials shall be handled with care to prevent entry of contaminants into sewers, storm drains, surface waters, or soils. 1.02 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall not discharge smoke, dust, and other contaminants into the atmosphere that violate the air pollution regulations for the area. Internal combustion engines shall not be allowed to idle for prolonged periods of time. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain construction vehicles and equipment in good repair. Exhaust emissions that are determined to be excessive by the ENGINEER or OWNER shall be repaired or replaced. 1.03 NOISE CONTROL A. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all local controls and noise level rules, regulations, and ordinances, which apply to any work performed pursuant to the November 2010 01560 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Environmental Controls Contract. If the requirements of this Section are more restrictive than those of the local regulations, the requirements of this Section shall govern. B. Each internal combustion engine, used for any purpose related to this Contract, shall be enclosed and be equipped with a muffler of a type recommended by the manufacturer. No internal combustion engine shall be operated on the project without said muffler and enclosure. 1.04 TRACK OUT A. The CONTRACTOR shall not drive or move any vehicle or equipment which tracks dirt, mud, or debris upon the surface of any street, sidewalk, parking area, or other paved surfaces. Any mud, dirt, or debris that is placed or tracked onto paved surfaces shall be removed and the area swept by the end of the same workday. 1.05 HAZARDOUS WASTE DISPOSAL A. It is the goal of the OWNER to maintain the category "Conditionally Exempt, Small Quantity Generator," regarding generation of Hazardous Waste. Pounds of waste generated by CONTRACTOR during construction activities are to be charged against the CONTRACTOR's EPA ID number and not against the local site EPA ID. This will require CONTRACTOR to remove materials, which meet Oregon's definition of Hazardous Waste, from OWNER's property as frequently as practical. Removal shall be done before consolidation, manifesting, or shipping of the waste, preferably by each workday's end. Recycling or proper disposal of such waste is to be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR or its agent. END OF SECTION November 2010 01560 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Environmental Controls SECTION 01605 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Equipment, products and materials shall be shipped, handled, stored, and installed in ways, which will prevent damage to the items. Damaged items will not be permitted as part of the work except in cases of minor damage that have been satisfactorily repaired and are acceptable to the OWNER 1.02 The CON TRACTOR shall make arrangement to have shipments delivered to staging area. The OWNER will not accept shipments. PART 2 - PIPE 2.01 Pipe, valves, fittings, and appurtenances shall be handled, stored, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipes with paint, tape coatings, linings or the like shall be stored to protect the coating or lining from physical damage or other deterioration. Pipes shipped with interior bracing shall have the bracing removed only when recommended by the pipe manufacturer. PART 3 - EQUIPMENT 3.01 PACKAGE AND MARKING A. All equipment shall be protected against damage from moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during transport from manufacturer's premises to site. Each item or package shall be marked with the number unique to the specification reference covering the item. B. Stiffeners shall be used where necessary to maintain shapes and to give rigidity. Parts of equipment shall be delivered in assembled or subassembled units where possible. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Each item of equipment and valve shall have permanently affixed to it a label or tag with its equipment or valve number designated in this contract. Marker shall be of stainless steel. Location of label will be easily visible. Tags shall be as specified in Section 11000. 3.03 SHIPPING A. Bearing housings, vents and other types of openings shall be wrapped or otherwise sealed to prevent contamination by grit and dirt. November 2010 01605 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Shipment, Protection and Storage B. Damage shall be corrected to conform to the requirements of the contract before the assembly is incorporated into the work. The CONTRACTOR shall bear the costs arising out of dismantling, inspection, repair and reassembly. 3.04 STORAGE A. During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, all equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from weather, dust and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to in addition to these requirements. B. Equipment and materials to be located outdoors may be stored outdoors if protected against moisture condensation. Equipment shall be stored at least 6 inches above ground. Temporary power shall be provided to energize space heaters or other heat sources for control of moisture condensation. Space heaters or other heat sources shall be energized without disturbing the sealed enclosure. 3.05 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AFTER INSTALLATION A. After installation, all equipment shall be protected from damage from, including but not limited to, dust, abrasive particles, debris and dirt generated by the placement, chipping, sandblasting, cutting, finishing and grinding of new or existing concrete, terrazzo and metal; and from the fumes, particulate matter, and splatter from welding, brazing and painting of new or existing piping and equipment. As a minimum, vacuum cleaning, blowers with filter, protective shielding, and other dust suppression methods will be required at all times to adequately protect all equipment. During concreting, including finishing, all equipment that may be affected by cement dust must be completely covered. END OF SECTION November 2010 01605 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Shipment, Protection and Storage SECTION 01650 COlVEVIISSIONING AND FACILITY STARTUP PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The CON TRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to commission all systems and equipment provided by OWNER and CONTRACTOR to verify performance, function, and correct operation by performing procedures to activate, startup, adjust, and test the systems and equipment provided as part of this project. Commissioning shall demonstrate that the work is in operating order in accordance with the general requirements of this specification section and the detailed requirements of the technical specification sections for the system or equipment specified. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals: B. A detailed, written plan for the startup and initial operation, under actual operating conditions, of the equipment and systems installed and constructed under this contract. This document, after acceptance by the ENGINEER, shall serve as the guidance manual for the commissioning process. C. Copies of all test reports upon completion of the individual tests. D. Affidavits 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE AND AFFIDAVITS A. Field Service • 1. Where specified that the manufacturer of equipment shall provide field service, the service shall be provided by an authorized factory trained and qualified manufacturer's representative for the specific equipment. Equipment shall not be considered ready for full time operation until after the manufacturer's representative has checked and adjusted the equipment, and certified by written affidavit that the equipment has been properly installed, tested, adjusted, lubricated, and calibrated, and is ready for full time operation. November 2010 01650 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Commissioning and Facility Startup B. Affidavits 1. Acceptable affidavits shall be submitted prior to completion of the work. Affidavits shall contain the following specific wording: a. "The Name of Equipment has been properly installed, tested, adjusted, lubricated, and calibrated, and is ready for full time operation. The installation has been inspected and has been found to be in conformance with our (the manufacturer's) standards and requirements." b. No amplification, dilution, or modification of this specific wording will be permitted. PART 2 — NOT USED PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INITIAL STARTUP AND OPERATION OF FACILTI'IES A. The following listing is a general sequence of startup activity steps to be used in placing facility systems in operation: 1. Perform initial lubrication of equipment and have manufacturers check and adjust equipment. Provide all subsequent lubrication and maintenance, and such staff as required for test operation until the OWNER assumes equipment maintenance responsibility. 2. Perform satisfactory testing of electrical work required prior to energizing the electrical system. 3. Test - operate equipment by manually initiating operation. Where manual operation bypasses alarm or safety monitoring, provide continuous supervision of such parameters. 4. Complete instrumentation calibration. 5. Complete Operation Readiness Testing (ORT 1). 6. Complete the performance testing when specified for equipment in the individual equipment specification sections. 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 as required for other equipment items and systems. It may be necessary for the CONTRACTOR to put portions of the newly constructed facility in service before construction of other portions of the facility or completing the Work as a whole. 8. Upon completion of all the above steps, initiate the operation testing and commissioning period. For the operational testing and commissioning, the new equipment shall be activated to automatically run for 10 days. During this 10 -day period, the OWNER will run the different combinations of the equipment control options. If equipment failure occurs during the 10 days of operational testing, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace the defective equipment and shall begin another 10 -day operational test. This • November 2010 01650 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Commissioning and Facility Startup shall be continued until the new equipment functions acceptably for 10 consecutive days. 9. After successful completion of testing, completion of required training, commissioning, and receipt of final O &M manuals, the OWNER will take over maintenance duties as well as operation and will begin to provide and pay for operation and maintenance costs. 10. Complete all documentation of tests for record submittal prior to final acceptance. B. OWNER shall not accept system and take over maintenance responsibilities until all of the above steps are successfully completed and final approved operation and maintenance manuals are received in accordance with Section 01730. END OF SECTION November 2010 01650 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Commissioning and Facility Startup (TIIIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 01700 RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 - STRUCTURES 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions necessary to protect the integrity and usefulness of all existing facilities. If necessary, the CONTRACTOR may, with the approval of the OWNER, remove existing structures, including curbs, gutters, pipelines, and utility poles, necessary for the performance of the work and shall rebuild or replace the structures in as good a condition as found. CON TRACTOR shall also repair existing structures, which may be damaged as a result of the work under this contract. PART 2 - ROADS AND STREETS 2.01 Roads, curbs, and streets in which the surface is removed, broken, or damaged, or in which the ground has caved or settled during the work under this contract, shall be brought to original grade and section and resurfaced. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be sawcut back far enough to provide clean solid vertical faces, and shall be free of loose material. Rough cuts shall not be allowed. PART 3 - CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS 3.01 Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements, which are damaged by CONTRACTOR, shall be restored to their original condition. Existing guard posts, barricades, and fences, which are damaged, shall be repaired. PART 4 - PROTECTION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS 4.01 CONTRACTOR shall immediately repair or replace all existing equipment, controls, structures, or facilities, which are damaged as part of his operations. • 4.02 CONTRACTOR shall take all measures necessary to ensure that construction debris and materials are kept out of the wastewater system. END OF SECTION November 2010 01700 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Restoration of Improvements (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 01720 RECORD DRAWINGS PART 1— SUMMARY 1.01 CONTRACTOR shall maintain a legibly marked -up set of contract documents showing the final location of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, and cables. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall keep a copy of all electrical, instrumentation, and shop drawings. A. Marking of the contract documents shall be performed using colored pencils as follows: 1. Additions Red 2. Deletions Green 3. Comments Blue 4. Dimensions Red (if change is to appear on final Record Drawings) 5. Dimensions Blue (if a dimensional note is not intended to appear on final Record Drawings) B. Record Drawings shall be full size and shall be available for review by OWNER at the work site. Copies of Electrical and Instrumentation/Control record drawings shall be made available to the OWNER prior to the OWNER taking beneficial occupancy of a phase: At the completion of the project, prior to final payment, all Record Drawings shall be submitted to OWNER. END OF SECTION November 2010 01720 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Record Drawings (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 1 SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL Operation and maintenance (O &M) information instructions shall be provided in accordance with this section and as required in the technical sections of this project manual. O &M information shall be provided for each maintainable material and piece of equipment. PART 2 - INFORMATION REQUIRED 2.01 GENERAL A. O &M information shall include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the manufacturer, nearest representative, and nearest supplier of parts. 2.02 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Instructions, procedures, and illustrations shall be provided for the following phases of operation as applicable: 1. Safety precautions. 2. Operator prestart. 3. Startup, shutdown, and post shutdown. 4. Normal operations. 5. Emergency operations. 6. Operator service requirements. 7. Environmental conditions. 2.03 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE A. The following preventative maintenance data shall be provided: 1. Lubrication data, including recommended lubricants for specific temperature ranges; charts and diagrams showing lubrications points; lubricant types, grades, and capacities; and a lubrication schedule. 2. Preventative maintenance plan and schedule. November 2010 01730 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 O &M Information 2.04 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE A. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be provided on procedures for correcting problems and making repairs, including the following: 1. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques. 2. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams, as applicable. 3. Maintenance and repair procedures. 4. Removal and replacement instructions. 5. Spare parts and supply lists. 6. Corrective maintenance manhours. 2.05 APPENDICES A. The following additional information shall be provided: 1. Parts identification, including labeled exploded view illustrations and parts numbers. 2. Warranty information. 3. Personnel training requirements. 4. Testing equipment and special tool information. PART 3 - TRANSNIITTAL PROCEDURE AND CONTENT 3.01 Number the transmittal for any Operation and Maintenance Manual with the original root number of the approved shop drawing for the item. 3.02 Submit 2 copies until approval is received. Submit five final copies after approval is received. 3.03 Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8-1/2 x 11 inches size heavy first quality paper with standard three -hole punching and bound in stiff metal hinged binder constructed as a three -ring style. Provide binders with titles and submittal number on front and on spine of binder. Tab each section of manuals for easy reference with plastic- coated dividers. Provide index for each manual. Provide plastic sheet lifter prior to first page and following last page. 3.04 Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8 -1/2 x 11 inches or 11 x 17 inches size. However, where reduction is not practical to ensure readability, fold larger drawings separately and place in vinyl envelopes which are bound into the binder. Identify vinyl envelopes with drawing numbers. November 2010 01730 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 O &M Information 3.05 Enclose one electronic copy of Operations and Maintenance manual in each hard -copy version. Electronic documentation shall be provided on standard CD -ROM media capable of being read by standard PC CD -ROM drives. All documents shall be provided in Adobe Systems portable document format (PDF). The resulting documents shall be viewable with Adobe Reader version 5.0 or higher. The PDF documents shall be produced using the postscript printer driver engine within Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later. Documents shall not be scanned unless no electronic form of the document exists. In such cases and with approval of the OWNER, the document shall be scanned in color, at 100 percent image scaling and a resolution of 300 dpi. All PDF files shall be text captured, image with hidden text, optimized, searchable and indexable using the Adobe Acrobat Catalog engine. 3.06 TRANSMITTAL CONTENT A. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not necessarily limited to: 1. Major equipment. 2. Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or greater. 3. Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and control system components for HVAC and process systems such as meters, recorders, and transmitters. 4. Valves greater than 6 IN DIA. 5. Water control gates. B. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals to include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following detailed information, as applicable: 1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting operations. 2. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. 4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 5. Guide to "troubleshooting." 6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 7. Outline, cross - section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring diagrams and interconnection diagrams. 8. Test data and performance curves. 9. A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of spare parts provided under these specifications. 10. Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other documents packed with equipment when delivered. November 2010 01730 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 O &M Information PART 4 - PAYMENT 4.01 Final acceptable O &M information packets must be delivered to the OWNER prior to the project being 75 percent complete based on progress payments. Progress payments for work completed beyond 75 percent complete will be delayed until .operating and maintenance information is submitted and approved by the OWNER. The OWNER will not be responsible to any late payment charges assessed to the CONTRACTOR • PART 5 - FIELD CHANGES 5.01 Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item, the item's instructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the CONTRACTOR to reflect any field changes or information requiring field data. END OF SECTION November 2010 01730 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 O &M Information SECTION 01999 REFERENCE FORMS The forms listed below and included in this section are referenced from other sections of the project manual: Form No. Title 01999 -1 Request for Clarification 01999 -2 Submittal Transmittal 01999 -3 Deactivation Request November 2010 01999 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Reference Form — Request for Clarification Clean Water Services RFC No. Durham Advanced Wastewater Treatment Facility Form 01999 -1 REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION Project: Durham • Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements Location: Durham AWWTF, 16060 SW 85 Avenue, Tigard, Oregon. Contractor: Area of Work in Question: PART(s), Division(s), Section(s), Paragraph(s)/Page(s), Sheet(s): Change Order Requested: [ ] Yes [ ] No Question(s): (Attach sketches as required) Submitted by: Date: Response: Response By: Date: Distribution: Contractor Owner Engineer File No. Form approved 4/3/00 November 2010 01999 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Reference Form — Request for Clarification Clean Water Services Submittal Transmittal No. Durham AWWTF Form 01999 -2 Project Name: Durham Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements Date Received: Project Number Checked By: Contractor: Engineer: Date Checked: Address: Address: Date Returned: Spec. Section: Attn: Attn: 1st. Sub. I I ReSub. Date Transmitted: Previous Transmittal Date: 11 No. Description Manufacturer Dwg. or Data No. Action Taken* Copies Remarks: *The Action Designated Above is in CONTRACTOR: Must certify one of the following Accordance with the Following Legend: statements pertaining to the transmittal or submittal sent for review: ❑ As the General Contractor for this project we certify that A No Exceptions Taken the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets B . Make Corrections Noted all the requirements, including coordination with all related C Amend and Re- Submit work specified (no exceptions). D Rejected E Engineer's review not required ❑ As the General Contractor for this project we certify that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified except for the attached deviations. Comments: By Date Distribution: Contractor I I Owner I I Engineer u File I I File No. November 2010 01999 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Reference Form — Submittal Transmittal CleanWater Services Our commitnient i s clear. Form 01999 -3 Deactiva Req N Dater of Request• k t A cr f. :',Project CWSirro�ect # 6446 M Aeration Basin 4 Miscellaneous Improvements . {.,.. .. Name Project'Contracfor- 041 ' _ z"` Equipmentl�f Pape Name Drawing # Lengthrof Out of Seance ry y. Deactiv Date/Time rry Gen Contractor i Contact 4 Sub4Contractor Contact O '." Name /Phone � x Name/Pho t x: Description of Request: (provide copy of plan sheet effected equipment) Attachments: Yes No Person Requesting: Owner/Engineer Response: Approved Denied Date Owner: Clean Water Services cc: Owner Contractor November 2010 01999 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Reference Form — Deactivation Request SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This section specifies demolition and salvage. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Demolition and equipment removal procedures shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. The procedures shall provide for careful removal of materials and equipment, protection of facilities which are to remain undisturbed, and timely disconnection and reconnection of utility services. Included shall be a time schedule for all demolition work. The schedule shall show demolition in relation to new construction, including temporary facilities. 1.03 PROTECTION OF FACILITIES A. Before beginning any demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully survey the existing work and examine the contract documents to determine the extent of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to facilities, which are to remain in place, and be responsible for any damages to these facilities resulting from this work. Damages to such work shall be repaired or replaced to its existing condition at no additional cost to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the work of this Section with all other work. The CONTRACTOR shall insure that structural elements are not overloaded, and be responsible for increasing structural supports or adding new supports, as may be required, as a result of any cutting, removal, or demolition work performed. 1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The OWNER assumes no responsibility for actual condition of the facilities to be demolished. Prior to the submittal of bids, the CONTRACTOR shall visit the site and inspect all facilities to get familiarized with all existing conditions and utilities and to verify the correctness of the drawings. PART 2 — NOT USED November 2010 02050 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Demolition and Salvage PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. The contract drawings identify the major equipment and facilities to be demolished. Auxiliary utilities such as water, air, drainage, lubrication oil, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown. These auxiliary utilities, as well as all equipment and pipe supports and all associated instrumentation devices pertaining to piping or equipment designated to be removed, shall be removed. B. Stainless steel anchors shall be cut even with the surface. Non - stainless anchors must be cut even with the surface and coated with Sika Armatec 110 at 2 layers of 20 mil thickness per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 SALVAGE A. No equipment will be salvaged to the client on this project. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Materials resulting from demolition operations, as well as mechanical and electrical equipment designated to be demolished but not salvaged, shall be the property of the CON TRACTOR and shall be removed and legally disposed of at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 3.04 CLEANING A. During and upon completion of the demolition operations, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove unused tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave work areas in a clean condition. B. The CONTRACTOR shall not sweep, grade, or flush surplus materials, rubbish, or debris into drains. C. OWNER's operations personnel will drain the Aeration Basin and associated channels of wastewater. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for cleaning concrete surfaces of the aeration basin and channels to prepare these surfaces for the new work, including achieving adequate bonding of new concrete to existing concrete and for placement of diffuser piping supports. 3.05 PROTECTION OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES A. CONTRACTOR shall make all reasonable efforts to protect all existing structures; mechanical and electrical equipment; and other improvements while demolition work is taking place. Measures shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Erecting temporary dust containment enclosures to protect existing mechanical and electrical equipment. November 2010 02050 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Demolition and Salvage 2. Placing temporary protection on floors, walls and structures to prevent impact damage. 3. Temporarily removing and reinstalling existing equipment and other improvements not currently in use. B. CONTRACTOR shall design and construct a debris containment system in Cells 5, 6 and 7 of Aeration Basins 4 to protect fine bubble diffusers from falling debris resulting from construction elsewhere in the cell. CONTRACTOR shall submit debris containment system design for review in accordance with Section 01300. END OF SECTION November 2010 02050 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Demolition and Salvage (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies reinforcing bar requirements for concrete construction. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings which include all reinforcing to be installed showing size, length, lap length, locations and all information needed to permit installation of reinforc- ing. B. Product Data: Mill certifications for all materials. Mechanical splicing materials shall be submitted for review and shown on shop drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. SP -66, ACI detailing manual. 2. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. A185, Standard Specification for Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement 3. A497, Standard Specification for Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Con- crete Reinforcement 4. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (Including Supplementary Requirements S1) 5. A706, Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement C. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.4, Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): Manual of Standard Practice November 2010 03200 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Concrete Reinforcing PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Reinforcing Bars to be welded: ASTM A706. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or ASTM A497. D. Smooth Dowel Bars: ASTM A615 grade 60 with metal end cap to allow longitu- dinal movement equal to joint width plus 1 inch. E. Proprietary Rebar Mechanical Splices: To develop in tension and compression a minimum of 125% of the yield strength of the bars being spliced. F. Welding Electrodes: E90 meeting requirements of AWS D1.4. G. Reinforcing dowels: Manufactured for the specific purpose of embedding and de- veloping the yield strength of the bars in hardened concrete. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Metal Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, Hangers and other supports: 1. 1. Plastic— coated tips in contact with forms 2. Plastic coating meeting requirements of CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 2.03 FABRICATION A. Tolerances 1. Sheared lengths: 1 inch 2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties and spirals: 1/2 inch 3. All other bends: +0 inch, -1/2 inch B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the rebar to be as indicated in ACI 318 paragraph 7.2. C. Ship bars to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags. 1. Place on each tag the mark number of the rebar corresponding to the mark number indicated on the shop drawing. 2. Mark numbers of tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed. 3. Store reinforcing on job site off the ground and protect from weather. November 2010 03200 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Concrete Reinforcing PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Tolerances 1. Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with ACI manual SP -66 and clearances shall be no less than 11/2 inches for #5 and smaller and 2 inches for #6 and larger, unless otherwise indicated on the construction drawings. 2. Minimum clear space between non - bundled bars shall be equal to the bar diameter or 1", whichever is greater and no less than the diameter of the largest aggregate in the concrete mix design. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide splice lengths as required per ACI 318 and placement per ACI SP -66. C. Mechanical splice connectors may only be used when approved or indicated on the contract documents. D. Welding 1. Perform welding of rebar in accordance with requirements of AWS D1.4. 2. Have each welder place an approved identifying mark near each completed weld. E. Placing Reinforcing Steel 1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is laced is free of mud oil or other materials that may affect or reduce bond. 2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale or a combination of both will not be accepted without cleaning or brushing provided dimension and weights in- cluding heights of deformations is not less than required by applicable ASTM specifications. 3. Reinforcing Steel Support a. Steel bars shall be supported on appropriately sized concrete ado - bies or chairs to meet clearance and spacing requirements. b. Supports shall be secured and placed at spacings where reinforcing deflected shapes are less than 1/8 inch. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Reinforcing Congestion and Interference 1. Notify ENGINEER whenever the specified clearances between bars cannot be met. 2. Do not place any concrete until the ENGINEER submits and solution to bar congestion problems. November 2010 03200 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Concrete Reinforcing 3. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforc- ing bars, conduits or embedded items. 4. No cutting of bars shall be done without written approval of the ENGINEER. B. Employ a testing laboratory to perform and report following: 1. Review and approve CON _TRACTOR proposed welding procedures and processes. 2. Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.4. 3. Test three samples of each bar size and each type of weld in accordance with AWS D1.4. The tensile strength of each test shall be not less than 125% of the required yield strength of the bar tested. 4. Conduct nondestructive field tests on not less than one random sample for each 10 welds. In addition if any welds are found defective, test five previ- ous welds performed by same welder. 5. Visually inspect each weld for presence of cracks, undercuts, inadequate size and other visible defects. C. All reinforcing installed with epoxy anchor system shall have Special Inspection. END OF SECTION November 2010 03200 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Concrete Reinforcing SECTION 03301 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section specifies cast -in -place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures and finishes. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: In addition to the following, comply with submittal requirements in ACI 301. B. Product Data: Shop drawings for reinforcing steel and anchorage systems. C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of cement of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Comply with the following specifications by the American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. Usually retain five subparagraphs below. See Evaluations for ACI 301 or- ganization. Four other Sections of ACI 301, "Architectural Concrete," • • "Mass Concrete," "Prestressed Concrete," and "Shrinkage- Compensating Concrete," could be added but usually fall outside the scope of this Section. 2. ACI 301 — Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings • 3. ACI 305 — Hot Weather Concreting 4. ACI 306 — Cold Weather Concreting 5. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 6. ACI 347 — Formwork for Concrete 7. ACI 350R — Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures November 2010 03301 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reference Specification section 03200. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. Type III or Type HE cement may be used for accelerated strength. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. b. Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal- Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1 -1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Water: ASTM C 94. 2.04 ADMIXTURES A. Air- Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be com- patible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water- soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017 /C 1017M, Type II. 2.05 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Multi -ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class C, or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick. B. Joint - Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt - saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self - expanding cork. C. Adhesive for Embedded Reinforcing Dowels: Where shown on the drawings, the CON'T'RACTOR is to embed lengths of reinforcing steel into holes drilled into the existing concrete. The adhesive product is to be the Hilti HIT RE- 500 -SD adhesive system or- equal. Locations, spacing, size and embedment is shown on the draw- ings. Installation is to conform to the manufacturer's directions. November 2010 03301 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete 2.06 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or ke- naf, weighing approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture- Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap - polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane - Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 2.07 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures. B. Normal - Weight Concrete: Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water - Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for 1 inch course aggregate, and 0.40 for 3 /4" inch course aggregate 3. Slump Limit: 1 inches — 3 inches for foundations and 1 inches — 4 inches for all other uses. 4. Air Entrainment: 5% +/- 1% 2.08 MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and furnish batch ticket. information. 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301. B. For the removal of formwork, forms not supporting the weight of concrete may be removed after a cumulative curing of not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours pro- viding that the concrete is sufficiently hard to resist damage from form removal. 3.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reference Specification section 03200. November 2010 03301 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete 3.03 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Control Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by ENGINEER. 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, sub- ject to limitations of ACI 301. C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Vibratory equipment shall not be applied to the exterior of concrete forms. D. Concrete lifts greater than 10 feet require form windows. E. The maximum concrete drop height shall be such as to avoid concrete segregation and shall not exceed 3 feet. F. Unless noted otherwise, prior to placing fresh concrete against existing concrete, the existing concrete surface must be clean and sound. Remove dust, laitance, grease and all other contaminants by blast cleaning, wire brushing or other effec- tive suitable method. Prior to placement of fresh concrete, apply Sikadur Armatec 110 to the mating surfaces, except as indicated in the construction drawings. Prod- uct must be applied in strict conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth - Formed Finish: To be used on all cast in place walls and infill sections As -cast concrete texture imparted by form - facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas such as honeycombs, air or rock pockets, and chips greater than 1/4 inch. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch. B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar un- formed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. November 2010 03301 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete 3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306 for cold - weather protection and with ACI 305 for hot - weather protection during curing. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: OWNER will engage a qualified independent testing and inspect- ing agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during con- crete placement according to requirements specified in this Article. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301. 1. Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 50 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 3.09 REPAIRS A. Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Sec- tion. END OF SECTION November 2010 03301 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Cast -in -Place Concrete (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY) SECTION 03600 GROUT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies grout for uses other than masonry. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Control by Contractor: To demonstrate conformance with the specified requirements for grout, the CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation showing that the grout complies with the requirements of this section. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Portland cement shall be ASTM C150 Type II or Type V, low alkali, containing less than 0.60 percent alkalies. B. Aggregate 1. General: Aggregate shall be nonreactive and shall be washed before use. When sources of aggregate are changed, test reports shall be provided for the new material. The tests specified shall be performed prior to commencing grout work. 2. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be hard, dense, durable particles of either sand or crushed stone regularly graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to ASTM C33 as modified herein. When tested in accordance with ASTM C136, gradation shall be such that 100 percent by weight will pass a standard No. 8 mesh sleeve and no less than 45 percent by weight will pass a standard No. 40 mesh sieve. - C. Admixtures 1. General: Admixtures shall be compatible with the grout. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are not acceptable. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be added separately to the grout mix. 2. Water Reducing Retarder: Water reducing retarder shall be ASTM C494 Type D and shall be Master Builders Pozzolith 300 -R, Sika Corporation Plastiment, or- equal. 3. Lubricant for Cement Pressure Grouting: Lubricant additive for cement pressure grouting shall be Intrusion Prepakt Intrusion Aid, Sika Intraplast N, or- equal. November 2010 03600 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Grout D. Water: Water for washing aggregate, for mixing and for curing shall be free from oil and deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials; shall not contain more than 1000 mg /1 of chlorides as Cl, nor more than 1300 mg/1 of sulfates as SO and shall not contain an amount of impurities that may cause a change of more than 25 percent in the setting time of the cement nor a reduction of more than 5 percent in the compressive strength of the grout at 14 days when compared with the result obtained with distilled water. Additionally, water used for curing shall not contain an amount of impurities sufficient to discolor the grout. 2.02 GROUT A. Drypack Grout: Drypack grout shall be a mixture of approximately one part cement, 1 -1/2 to 2 parts sand, water reducing retarder, and sufficient water to make a stiff workable mix. B. Cement Grout: Cement grout shall be a mixture of one part cement, two parts sand, proportioned by volume, admixtures for pressure grouting, and sufficient water to form a workable mix. C. Nonmetallic aggregate grout shall be Five Star Products, Inc. Five Star Grout, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Burke Company Non - Ferrous, Non - Shrink Grout, or- equal. Only non - metallic grout shall be used on this project. D. Epoxy Grout for Crack Repair 1. Epoxy for pressure grouting /crack injection shall be a two - component, moisture insensitive, high modulus, injection grade, 100 percent solids, blend of epoxy -resin compounds. The consistency shall, be as required to achieve complete penetration in hairline cracks and larger. Material shall conform to ASTM C881 Type 1 Grade 1, such as Sika Corporation Sikadur 52, Adhesive Engineering Company SCB products, Adhesive Technology Corporation SLV 300 series, or- equal. E. Epoxy Grout for Adhesive Anchors and Reinforcing Dowels 1. Epoxy for adhesive anchors & reinforcing dowels shall be Hilti RE -500- SD, or approved alternative. November 2010 03600 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Grout F. Polymer Concrete (for Resurfacing or Patching) 1. Polymer concrete (for resurfacing or patching) shall consist of a liquid binder and dry aggregate mixed together to make a mortar or grout of a consistency as required for the application. The liquid binder shall be a chemical and oil resistant, stress relieved, low modulus, moisture insensitive, two- component epoxy -resin compound. The consistency shall be similar to lightweight oil for proper mixing with aggregate. Material shall conform to ASTM C881 Type 3 Grade 1, such as Sika Corporation Sikadur Lo -Mod series, Adhesive Engineering Concresive 1470, Adhesive Technology Corporation 400 series, or- equal. 2. The aggregate shall be oven dry in sealed packages until time of mixing, and shall be of size and consistency compatible with recommendations of manufacturer of liquid binder for intended application. 2.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's Data: Manufacturer's data shall be provided for the following: 1. Bonding compounds. 2. Nonshrink grout. 3. Pressure grout. 4. Retardants. 5. Epoxy grout. 6. Polymer concrete. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Bonding compound and primer, if required for polymer concrete, shall be provided per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.02 DRYPACK GROUT A. Drypack grout shall be used for built -up surfaces, setting miscellaneous metal items and minor repairs. B. Surfaces required to be built up with drypack grout shall be roughened by brushing, cleaned, and coated with the bonding compound before the application of the grout. The drypack grout shall be applied immediately following the application of the bonding compound in bands or strips to form a covering of the required thickness. The covering shall be smooth. Construction joints in the grout shall be sloped and shall be cleaned and wetted before application is resumed. November 2010 03600 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Grout C. Drypack grout shall be cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Grout shall not be placed during freezing weather unless adequate protection is provided. 3.03 CEMENT GROUT A. Cement grout shall be used for filling nonbearing portions of equipment pads, for resurfacing concrete finishes and pressure grouting. B. Except for the specialized equipment for pressure grouting, mixing and placing apparatus shall be similar to that normally used for cast -in -place concrete. Grout shall be mixed for a period of at least 1 minute. Diluted grout shall be agitated to keep ingredients mixed. 3.04 NONSHRINK GROUT A. Nonshrink, nonmetallic aggregate grout shall be used for the bearing surfaces of machinery and equipment bases, column bases and bearing plates and for infilling around new pipe penetrations through existing concrete walls. B. Holes required for grouting shall be blown clean with compressed air and left free of dust or standing water. Horizontal holes for grouting shall be drilled at a slight downward angle to facilitate holding the grout until setting is complete. Bolts or reinforcing steel installed in horizontal grout holes shall be bent slightly accordingly. C. Prior to installation of nonshrink grout infill around pipe penetrations of existing concrete walls, the surface of existing concrete shall be treated with an epoxy paste adhesive. Roughen the surface of the existing concrete with a bush hammer or other means. Apply Sikadur Armatec 110 or -equal to a minimum thickness of 1/16 inch and a maximum thickness of 1/8 inch in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Epoxy paste adhesive shall conform to ASTM C -881. 3.05 EPDXY GROUT A. Epoxy grout shall be used for repairing cracks by pressure grouting or gravity flow, repairing structural concrete, for resurfacing concrete finishes and may be used for setting reinforcing dowels or anchor bolts into holes for grouting. Concrete shall be primed in accordance with the grout manufacturer's instructions. November 2010 03600 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Grout B. Use of epoxy grout for anchorage of bolts or reinforcing dowels shall be subject to the following conditions: 1. Use shall be limited to locations where exposure, on an intermittent or continuous basis, to acid concentrations higher than 10 percent, to chlorine gas, or to machine or diesel oils, is extremely unlikely. 2. Use shall be limited to applications where exposure to fire or exposure to concrete or rod temperature above the product's heat deflection temperature or 120 degrees F (whichever is less) is extremely unlikely. Overhead applications (such as pipe supports) because of the above concerns shall be disallowed. 3. Approval from ENGINEER for specific application and from supplier of equipment to be anchored, if applicable. 4. Anchor diameter and grade of steel shall be per contract documents or per equipment supplier specifications. Anchor shall be threaded or deformed full length of embedment and shall be free of rust, scale, grease, and oils. 5. Embedment depth and hole diameter shall be as specified. 6. Holes shall have rough surfaces, such as can be achieved using a rotary percussion drill. 7. Holes shall be blown clean with compressed air and be free of dust or standing water prior to application of grout. 8. Anchor shall be left undisturbed and unloaded for full curing period. 9. Anchors shall not be placed in concrete below 25 degrees F. 3.06 PRE S SURE GROUTING A. Prior to grouting, systems and holes to be grouted shall be washed clean. Washing is not required for grouting soil voids outside pipe cylinders or casing pipes. Grouting, once commenced, shall be completed without stoppage. In case of breakdown of equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall wash out the grouting system sufficiently to ensure fresh grout and adequate bond and penetration will occur upon restarting the grouting operation. Grout pressure shall be maintained until grout has set. END OF SECTION November 2010 03600 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Grout (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL I9 • SECTION 05501 ANCHOR BOLTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies anchor bolts complete with washers and nuts. All anchor bolts and associated hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's catalog data, showing materials of construction, edge distance requirements, and rated capacities. C. Installation instructions. D. The CON TRACTOR shall supply the ENGINEER with the current evaluation report from the International Conference of Building Officials for the particular brand of anchor bolts to be used. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Anchor boltholes in equipment support frames shall not exceed the bolt diameters by more than 25 percent, up to a limiting maximum oversizing of 1/4 inch. Unless otherwise specified, minimum anchor bolt diameter shall be 1/2 inch. B. Tapered washers shall be provided where mating surface is not square with the nut. 2.02 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. Anchor bolts shall be per the construction drawings and shall be stainless steel. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fieldwork, including cutting and threading, shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Grouting of anchor bolts with nonshrink or epoxy grouts, where specified, shall be in accordance with Section 03600. November 2010 05501 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Anchor Bolts B. Minimum distance from edge of anchor bolt to edge of concrete shall be 6 inches unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. 3.02 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS A. Use of adhesive anchors shall be subject to the following conditions: 1. Use shall be limited to locations where exposure, on an intermittent or continuous basis, to acid concentrations higher than 10 percent, to chlorine gas, or to machine or diesel oils, is extremely unlikely. 2. Approval from ENGINEER for specific application and from supplier of equipment to be anchored, if applicable. 3. Anchor diameter and grade of steel shall be per contract documents or per equipment supplier specifications. Anchor shall be threaded or deformed full length of embedment and shall be free of rust, scale, grease, and oils. 4. Embedment depth shall be as specified. 5. All installation recommendations by the anchor system manufacturer shall be followed carefully, including maximum hole diameter. 6. Holes shall have rough surfaces, such as can be achieved using a rotary percussion drill. 7. Holes shall be blown clean with compressed air and be free of dust or standing water prior to installation. 8. Anchor shall be left undisturbed and unloaded for full adhesive curing peri od. 9. Concrete temperature (not air temperature) shall be compatible with curing requirements of adhesives per adhesive manufacturer. Anchors shall not be placed in concrete below 25 degrees F. 10. Special Inspection is required for the installation of all adhesive anchors. 3.03 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. Use of expansion or wedge type anchors shall be subject to conditions 2, 3, 4, 6, and 7, specified in paragraph 3.02. END OF SECTION November 2010 05501 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Anchor Bolts SECTION 05505 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: 1. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units not otherwise indicated to be supplied under work of other sections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards 1. Aluminum Association (AA) a. SAS -30, Specifications for Aluminum Structures 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. A14.3, Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel b. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold- Finished, Standard Quality c. Al23, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products d. A153, Standard Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware e. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength £ A780, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot - Dipped Galvanized Coatings g. A786, Standard Specification for Rolled Steel Floor Plate h. B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes i. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy 6061 -T6 Standard Structural Shapes j. B632, Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate k. F467, Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Nuts for General Use 1. F468, Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. November 2010 05505 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications m. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 4. American Welding Society (AWS) a. A5.1, Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes. b. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel. c. D1.2, Structural Welding Code Aluminum. • 5. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. Metal Bar Grating Manual. 6. U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General Industry (referred to herein as OSHA standards). 7. Provide all fabricated items complying with the current version of the State Building Code, and OSHA Regulations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer or applicator are synonymous. B. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. See Section 01300. 2. Fabrication and /or layout drawings: a. Submit shop drawings for all fabrications and assemblies. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. November 2010 05505 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Div., TRW Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc. c. Eric /Jones Stud Welding Div. 2. All Purpose Metal Framing a. Unistrut Building Systems b. B -Line Systems c. Allied Tube and Conduit d. Metal Products Div., USG Industries, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel 1. Structural Steel: ASTM A572 Grade 50. 2. Structural Steel Channel: ASTM A36. 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B. 4. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. 5. Bolts, Nuts and Washers, High Strength: ASTM A325. a. Provide washers with all nuts. 6. Bolts and Nuts: Unfinished, ASTM A307, Grade A. a. Provide washers with all nuts. 7. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A36. 8. Electrodes for Welding Steel: AWS A5.1, E70 Series. 9. Steel Forgings: ASTM A668. B. Aluminum 1. Rolled shapes and extrusions: ASTM B308 or B221. • 2. Castings: ASTM B26 3. Alloys 6061 -T6 or 6063 -T6, unless specified otherwise in this Section 4. Aluminum angles beams, pipes, plates and channels: Alloy 6061 -T6. 5. Electrodes for welding aluminum: AWS 1.2, filler alloy 4043 or 5356. C. Washers: Same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and nuts. D. Galvanizing: ASTM Al23 or A525 with minimum coating of 1.5 OZ per square foot. All steel shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Galvanizing repair shall be in accordance with ASTM A -780 E. Deformed Bar Anchors: ASTM A496 with a minimum tensile strength of 80,000 psi and a minimum yield strength of 70,000 psi. November 2010 05505 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications F. All Purpose Metal Framing 1. Material: Stainless Steel. 2. Channel and Inserts a. Minimum 12 GA. b. Channels to have one side with a continuous slot with inturned lips. 3. Fittings: Stainless Steel. 4. Nuts: Stainless Steel with toothed grooves in top of nuts to engage the inturned lips of channel. 5. Finish: None. 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Aluminum Grating 1. ANSI MBG 531: Grating shall be aluminum unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. Bearing Bars: Rectangular, 1 1 /4x3 /16 IN at 1 3/16 IN OC spacing or I- bar, 1 1 /4 IN deep with minimum 1/16 IN thick bar and minimum 1 /4 IN flange width at 1 3/16 IN OC spacing, unless otherwise noted. 3. Cross Bars: Welded, swagged or pressure locked to bearing bars. a. Maximum 4 IN OC spacing. 4. Top Edges of Bars: Grooved or serrated. 5. Removable Grating Sections: Not wider than 3 FT and not more than 100 LBS. 6. Standard mill finish. • 7. Ends and Perimeter Edges: Banded. 8. Openings through Grating: Reinforced to provide required load carrying capacity and banded with 4 IN high toe plate. 9. Provide joints at openings between individual grating sections. 10. Clips and Bolts: Stainless steel. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. B. Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, true angles, and smooth curves. C. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges. D. Weld Permanent Shop Connections 1. Welds to be continuous fillet type unless indicated otherwise. 2. Full penetration butt weld miter joints at bends in stair and ladder stringers. 3. Weld structural steel in accordance with AWS D1.1 using Series E70 electrodes conforming to AWS A5.1. November 2010 05505 -4 . Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications 4. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed. E. Conceal fastenings where practicable. F. Punch or drill for field connections and for attachment of work by other trades. G. Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as is practicable. H. Finishes 1. See Section 09900 for preparation and painting of ferrous metals and other surfaces. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate condition for product compatibility. B. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb. B. Shim and grout as necessary. C. Bolt Field Connections: Where practicable, conceal fastenings. D. Welded Connections: Grind welds smooth where field welding is required. E. Unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Connect steel members to steel members with 1/2 IN DIA ASTM A325 high strength bolts. 2. Connect steel members to concrete and masonry using 1/2 IN DIA stainless steel expansion bolts. unless shown otherwise. Provide dissimilar materials protection. F. Install and tighten ASTM A325 high- strength bolts in accordance with 9th Edition of Manual of Steel Construction. 1. Provide hardened washers for all ASTM A325 bolts. Provide the hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening. November 2010 05505 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications G. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping length or change of direction requires splicing. Provide full penetration welded splices where continuity is required. H. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or required to install. I. Anchor metal work so that work will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from expansion and contraction. J. Tie anchor bolts in position to embedded reinforcing steel using wire. Tack welding prohibited. Coat bolt threads and nuts with heavy coat of clean grease. Anchor bolt location tolerance: 1/16 IN. Provide steel templates for all column anchor bolts. K. Accurately locate and place frames for openings before casting into floor slab so top of plate is flush with surface of finished floor. Keep screw holes clean and ready to receive screws. L. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips and bolts. 1. Maximum spacing: 2 FT OC with minimum of two per side. 2. Attach individual units of grating together with clips or attachments at 2 FT OC maximum with a minimum of two clips per side. M. Prepare and paint ferrous metals in accordance with Section 09900. N. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION November 2010 05505 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Metal Fabrications SECTION 05520 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum handrail. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Railing will meet the requirements and standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and the International Building Code. Railing, kickplates and curbing are required where shown on Drawings. B. Qualify all welders and welding procedures in accordance with ASME Section IX and AWS C5.5. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures: Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Certified Test Reports: Submit certificates before fabrication of railings, which attest to their material complying with these Specifications. 2. Layout and installation shop drawings. 3. Certification of welders and welding procedures. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A. Welded Railing Systems 1. Tutle Aluminum and Bronze 2. Architectural Art Mfg. Inc. 3. Universal Products, Inc. 4. Or- equal. B. Non - welded Pre - engineered Railings 1. Hollaender Railing Systems 2. Or- equal. 2.02 MATERIALS November 2010 05520 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aluminum Handrails A. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings, railing to be aluminum. B. Materials 1. Pipe: Alloy 6061 -T6, ASTM B241 or ASTM B221, Schedule 40. • 2. Sheet and Plate: 6061 -T6 aluminum, ASTM B209. 3. Bars, Rods, Shapes (Pickets and Tubes): ASTM B221. 4. Cast Fittings: Aluminum, ASTM B108 or ASTM B210. 5. Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel. ASTM F593 with minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi and minimum tensile strength of 70,000 psi unless noted otherwise. Provide edge distance cover as recommended by manufacturer, or as indicated on Drawings. 6. Electrodes for Welding a. Aluminum: AWS D1.2. b. Filler alloy 5356 or 4043. 7. Perforated Metal Panels: Aluminum Wire ASTM B211. C. Nonshrink Grout 1. Per Section 03600 2.03 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE A. General 1. Fabricate smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. 2. Form exposed work with smooth, short radius bends, accurate angles and straight sharp edges: a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 -inch. b. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 3. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints: a. Locate top rail splices and expansion joints within 8 -inch of post or other support. November 2010 05520 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aluminum Handrails 4. Anchorage of the type indicated on Drawings or as required by field conditions. 5. Design railing and anchorage to withstand a 200 lb. force applied at any point, in any direction, without failure or permanent set. 6. Custom fabricate pipe railings to dimensions and profiles. 7. Provide 3 rails and toeboard where required. Provide 4 inches high toeboards suitable for attachment to handrail posts with clamps at all walkways with handrail and at elevated walkways and platforms. 8. Limit post spacing to a maximum of 4 feet. B. Aluminum Railing Fabrication 1. All railing to be prefabricated or component formed, marked and sized for on -site installation. 2. Top railing to be single unspliced length attached to a minimum of three posts where possible. 3. Posts and intermediate railings: Single unspliced lengths of pipe. 4. Finish a. Meet requirements of AAMA 605.2 5. Expansion Joints a. Allow thermal expansion and contraction of railing while still meeting design - loading requirements. 6. Weep Holes a. Fabricate 3/16 -inch diameter weep holes in railing 1 -inch above walkway surface. b. Required at all exterior vertical posts set in concrete or otherwise closed at bottom. c. Required at all other low spots in railing system. C. Chain: For temporary closure between aluminum railing use stainless steel chain with 1/2 -inch diameter links. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, and true. Measure from established lines and items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. Verify measurements at the site. C. Adjust railings prior to securing in place to assure proper matching at butting and expansion joints and correct alignment throughout their length: November 2010 05520 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aluminum Handrails 1. Plumb posts in each direction. 2. Space wall brackets not more than 5 feet on center. 3. Space aluminum posts not more than 5 feet on center. D. Install proper sized expansion joints based on temperature at time of installation and differential coefficient of expansion of materials in all railings as recommended by manufacturer. Joints to be designed to allow expansion and contraction of railing and still meet design loads required. END OF SECTION November 2010 05520 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aluminum Handrails SECTION 09960 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 — GENERAL • 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Field- applied, high performance coatings and requirements for surface preparation. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. The following categories of work are not included as part of field - applied finish work. 1. Factory- Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include field applied coatings when factory- finishing or installer - finishing is specified within the specific specification Section for that item. a. Examples include, but are not limited to, finished mechanical and electrical equipment such as pumps, engines, light fixtures, electrical switchgear enclosures, and power distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, field applied coatings are not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas. a. Examples include, but are not limited to, spaces above suspended ceilings, foundation spaces, furred areas, and pipe chases. B. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under specific specification Sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items. 1.03 GOVERNING STANDARDS AND RECOMMENDED PRACTICES A. Standards and recommended practices listed in this Article govern the Work_unless otherwise specified. B. ASTM — American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM D5402, Standard Practice For Assessing the Solvent Resistance of Organic Coating 2. ASTM D 4940, Detecting Contamination on Abrasive C. AWWA — American Water Works Association November 2010 09960 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 1. AWWA D102, Standard for Painting Steel Water - Storage Tanks. 2. AWWA C652, Disinfections of Water Storage Facilities. D. NSF International — National Science Foundation 1. NSF 61, Listing of Certified Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects E. SSPC — The Society for Protective Coatings 1. SSPC- Vol. 1, Steel Structures Painting Manual, Good Painting Practice 2. SSPC- Vol. 2, Steel Structures Painting Manual, Systems and Specifications 3. SSPC -SP1, Solvent Cleaning 4. SSPC -SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning 5. SSPC -SP3, Power Tool Cleaning 6. SSPC -SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning 7. SSPC -SP7 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning 8. SSPC -SP10 Near White Blast Cleaning 9. SSPC -SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning 10. SSPC -SP11, Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal 11. SSPC -SP15, Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning 12. SSPC -Guide 12, Illumination of Industrial Painting Projects 13. SSPC -PA1, Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting 14. SSPC -PA2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gauges 15. SSPC -PA, Guide 3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application 16. SSPC -AB1, Mineral and Slag Abrasives 17. SSPC -VIS 1, 02 -12 Reference Photographs, Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning 18. SSPC -VIS 3, 93 -04 Visual Standards for Power and Hand - Tool Cleaned Steel F. NACE International — National Association of Corrosion Engineers International 1. Joint NACE /SSPC -SP5 /5 NACE #1 White Metal Blast 2. Joint NACE /SSPC- SP10/NACE #2 Near White Metal Blast 3. Joint NACE /SSPC- SP6/NACE #3 Commercial Blast 4. Joint NACE /SSPC- SP7/NACE #4 Brush -off Blast November 2010 09960 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 5. Joint NACE /SSPC- SP12/NACE #5 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Water Jetting Prior to Recoating 6. Joint NACE /SSPC- SP13/NACE #6 Surface Preparation of Concrete 7. NACE RPO178 Appendix C - Degrees of Surface Finishing of Welds 8. NACE RP0287 Field Measurement of Surface Profile 9. NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Paint: All coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, . sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. B. Stripe Coat: A layer of coating material applied by brush along edges and over welds to minimize edge breakdown. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Apply coatings that are specifically formulated for application in water, wastewater, and stormwater applications. B. Compatibility of Coating System Components: Apply coating materials for each specified coating system, including primer, intermediate coat, finish coats, produced by the same manufacturer. Use thinners, cleaners and other additives recommended by the coating manufacturer for the specified system. C. Use only coatings that are free of asbestos, lead, cadmium, and chromate. D. Volatile Organic Content (VOC) of Applied Coatings 1. Comply with air quality regulations mandated by jurisdictional agencies. 2. Determine VOC concentrations in accordance with ASTM D3960. 3. If the specified products are not available in formulations that meet applicable VOC limits, supply alternative products of equivalent quality and function that comply with VOC regulations in effect at the time. E. Shop Applied Coatings 1. Except as otherwise specified, prime coats may be shop applied or field applied. a. Shop Applied Primer: Compatible with the specified coating system and applied at the minimum dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer. November 2010 09960 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 2. Repair damaged, deteriorated, and failed finish coatings that have been shop - applied to items delivered to the project site. a. Items requiring extensive repairs: Remove failed coating system and re -apply new coating system. Repair may be undertaken in field or item may be shipped back to factory. b. Items requiring spot repairs: Remove coating from area surrounding damage, exposing bare substrate. Re -apply and touch up the prime coat and finish coats to achieve the specified film thickness and continuity. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Coating manufacturer's technical data on product and recommended use. Include the brand name and series number of coatings to be used. 2. Coating manufacturer's surface preparation criteria, including recommended surface profile range after abrasive blasting. 3. Coating manufacturer's product data sheets that include application instructions, equipment recommendation, temperature and humidity limitations, pot life and induction requirements, drying and curing times, and recoat cycle times. Provide maximum and minimum material and substrate temperatures for proper application. 4. Contractor's written program for over spray prevention. 5. Coating manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all Product to be used on the project, including solvents, additives, cleaners and thinners. B. Contractor's safety program to be employed on this project which complies with the current requirements of Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OHSA) and this Specification. C. Quality Assurance Certifications 1. Coating Manufacturer's experience certification. 2. Coating Applicator's qualifications certification. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coatings Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Specialize in the manufacture of high performance coatings used in water, stormwater, and wastewater environments with a minimum of 10 years successful experience. November 2010 09960 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings B. Coatings Applicator Qualifications 1. Coating Applicator shall be a qualified participant of the coatings manufacturer's "Approved Applicator" program. a. Coating Applicator's personnel shall receive training from the Coatings Manufacturer in proper surface preparation, coating application, and testing for each specific product. 2. Minimum of five (5) years experience and successful history in the application of similar products on comparable projects. Substantiate this requirement by furnishing a written list of projects, references, and phone number of contacts. 3. Coatings Applicator Personnel a. Provide a supervisor at the work site during surface preparation and coating operations. b. Provide personnel trained and qualified to perform work to industry standards of practice and safety. C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Abrasive Blasting: Comply with the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency and state Air Quality Management District requirements for dry outdoor blasting. 2. Coatings: Comply with regulations of jurisdictional governing agencies by using coatings that do not exceed permissible volatile organic compound limits and coatings that do not contain lead. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. Delivery 1. Deliver coating products in original sealed containers identified with labels indicating manufacturer; product name and number; color, batch or lot number; and date of manufacture. 2. Note the date of manufacture and apply coatings prior to the expiration of the recommended storage life. Coating materials exceeding storage life will be rejected. 3. Factory Coated Items: Protect coated surfaces from damage during shipping and handling. B. Storage 1. Store coating materials in a protective enclosure to protect from weather and excessive heat or cold. November 2010 09960 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 2. Coatings stored at above or below manufacturers recommendations will be rejected. 3. Comply with state and local requirements for storage of flammable materials. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply coatings when surface moisture, surface temperature, relative humidity, or other environmental conditions exceeds manufacturer's specified limits. B. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and the ambient temperature is within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. C. Provide fans, heaters, dehumidifiers, or other devices to prevent formation of condensate on surfaces. D. When necessary to maintain progress, erect temporary tents or enclosures and provide adequate ventilation and /or heating systems to maintain the environment within the temporary enclosure minimum and maximum temperatures. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. Carefully contain paints and solvents. Do not allow them to penetrate the soil. B. Utilize drop cloths to protect walkways, floors, pre- finished materials, building fixtures, and other similar items. Contractor is responsible for damage caused by coating application. C. Dispose of waste material in a legal manner. 1.11 SCAFFOLDING AND PROTECTION • A. Furnish, maintain and remove scaffolding, ladders, planks required for application of coatings. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products identified for each coating system are the product names from specific manufacturers. Coatings products from other manufacturers and of equal or higher quality and performance may also be acceptable. 1. Requests for Substitution of Alternative Coatings Products: November 2010 09960 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings a. Include the full name of each product, descriptive literature, test data, data on past performance, manufacturer's instruction for use, generic type, and its nonvolatile content by volume. b. Demonstrate product and performance is equivalent to the specified materials and complete systems. c. Demonstrate that the coatings manufacturer has local qualified representation which will provide onsite technical support to resolve field problems with the manufacturer's products, materials or application for the duration of the project. B. Requests for substitution of alternative coating products that decreases the specified dry-film thickness or the number of coats to be applied, or which changes the generic type of coating specified, will not be considered. 2.02 COATING SYSTEM DESIGNATIONS A. Coating System Designations: The following designations are used in this Section: 1. E: Epoxy -based coating system. 2. F: Fusion - bonded Epoxy -based system. 3. M: Mastic -based coating system. 4. U: Urethane -based coating system. 5. UT: Urethane -based coating system designed for Immersion. 2.03 COATING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL A. Coating Systems for Steel — Severe Service (Non - Potable) 1. System UI -5 Urethane -based coating system (designed for Immersion) — One Prime /Two Finish Coats: a. Surface preparation: Abrasive blasted in compliance with SSPC- SP 10 /NACE No. 2 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. Obtain an anchor pattern between 1.5 and 2.0 mils. b. Primer: Single coat, shop- or field- applied, two- component Micaceous Iron Oxide Immersion Grade Urethane. Products: Sherwin Williams Cor -Cote HB; Tnemec 446; or equal applied at 5.0 to 10.0 dry mils. c. Stripe Coat: Field- applied, two - component Micaceous Iron Oxide Immersion Grade Urethane. Products: Sherwin - Williams Cor- Cote HB; Tnemec 446; or equal applied at 3.0 to 4.0 dry mils to all welds and sharp edges per SSPC -PA 1. d. Finish Coat: Single coat, field - applied two- component Micaceous Iron Oxide Immersion Grade Urethane. Products: Sherwin - November 2010 09960 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings Williams Cor -Cote BB; Tnemec 446; or equal applied at 5.0 to 10.0 dry mils. 2. System E -3 High Solids Epoxy — One Prime /One Finish Coats a. Surface Preparation: Abrasive blasted in compliance with SSPC- SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. Obtain an anchor pattern between 1.5 and 2.0 mils. b. Primer: Single coat, shop- or field- applied, two - component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646FC; Tnemec 66 series; or equal applied at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. c. Stripe Coat: Field - applied, two- component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646FC; Tnemec 66 Series; or equal applied at 3.0 to 4.0 dry mils to welds and sharp edges per SSPC -PA 1. d. Finish Coat: Field - applied, two- component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin- Williams Macropoxy 646 FC; Tnemec 66 Series; or equal applied at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. B. Coating Systems for Steel — Exterior Exposure 1. System U -1 Bare Steel — Acrylic Urethane: a. Surface Preparation: Abrasive blasted in compliance with SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning. b. Primer: Single coat, shop- or field- applied, two- component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646FC; Tnemec Series 66; or equal applied at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. c. Intermediate Coat: Field applied two - component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646 FC; Tnemec Series 66; or equal applied at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. d. Stripe Coat: Field - applied, two - component polyamide epoxy. Products: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646FC; Tnemec Series 66; or equal applied at 2.0 to 3.0 dry mils to welds and sharp edges per SSPC -PA 1. e. Finish Coat: Field- applied, semi -gloss polyurethane. Products: Sherwin- Williams Acrolon 218HS B65 -650 series; Tnemec Series 1075 -Color Endura- Shield II applied at 3.0 to 5.0 dry mils in one to two coats, or equal. 2. System U -2 Overcoat — Acrylic Urethane: a. Clean previously coated steel surfaces in accordance with SSPC- SP 12/NACE No. 5 Surface Preparation of Metals by Water Jetting Prior to Recoating (HP WC) at pressures of 5,000 to 7,000 psi using a zero degree revolving tip. November 2010 09960 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 1) Following water blasting, scarify coating material remaining on metal substrate using 80 to 100 grit sandpaper. b. Clean hot - dipped galvanized components in accordance with SSPC -SP1 Solvent Cleaning followed by SSPC- SP7/NACE No. 4 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning in compliance with ASTM D 6386 to provide a surface profile of 1.5 to 2.0 mils for interior surfaces and a surface profile of 1.0 to 1.5 mils for exterior surfaces. c. Spot Prime: Field- applied, two - component polyamide epoxy. Product: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646 FC; Tnemec Series 135 Chembuild, or equal at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils to all bare steel, overlapping adjacent coating by 2 to 4 inches. d. Full Prime: Field- applied, two - component epoxy. Product: Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646 FC; Tnemec Series 135 Chembuild Light Gray to be selected, or equal at 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. e. Finish: Field - applied, semi -gloss polyurethane. Product: Sherwin - Williams Acrolon 218 HS B65 -650 series; Tnemec Series 1075 - Color Endura - Shield II; or equal applied at 3.0 to 5.0 dry mils. C. Coating System for Buried Ferrous Metal 1. Wrapping Tape — Petrolatum Based (M -1). a. Clean surfaces per SSPC -SP2 Hand Tool and /or SP3 Power Tool Clean. b. Prime Paste 1) Field apply as recommended by tape manufacturer. 2) Hand rub or brush all surfaces with priming paste. 3) Liberally apply priming paste to sharp projects such as threads, irregular contours, or badly pitted areas to ensure maximum protection of metal throughout. c. Treat irregularly shaped surfaces such as nuts, bolts, flanges and valves per one of the following two methods: 1) Apply recommended mastic by hand in sufficient quantity to build an even contour over entire surface. Ensure that all folds and air pockets within the mastic layer are thoroughly pressed out prior to subsequent application of tape. Or 2) Cut and carefully mold an extra layer of tape around all sharp projections, nuts, bolts, etc., before final application of tape to meet specified system thickness. d. Tape • November 2010 09960 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 1) Spirally wrap with a 55% overlap and sufficient tension and pressure to provide continuous adhesion without stretching the tape. 2) Continuously smooth and seal by hand the edges of tape by hand during wrapping. 3) On vertical applications, begin at bottom and proceed upward, creating a weather board overlap. e. Minimum Finished Thickness 1) Smooth contours: 50 mils. 2) Irregular shaped surfaces: 100 mils. 2.04 ABRASIVES FOR BLAST CLEANING A. Use only new materials that are clean and free of contaminants. B. Certified by the local Air Quality Management District for use in dry, open air abrasive blasting. C. Comply with all applicable requirements of the local Air Quality Management District. D. Purchase only from firms which can accept spent abrasives, then process spent abrasives for recycle or proper disposal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Techniques 1. Use coverings or drop cloths to protect floors, concrete, appurtenances, equipment, prepared surfaces and applied coatings or paints. 2. Take precautions to prevent damage or contamination of coated surfaces from personnel entering containment areas or walking near coated surfaces. 3. Exercise care to prevent coating from being spattered onto surfaces that are not to be coated. 4. Recoat surfaces from which such material cannot be removed satisfactorily to produce a finish satisfactory to the Construction Manager. B. Where protection is required or provided for coated surfaces, maintain protection until the coating film has properly cured. C. Do not handle, work on or otherwise disturb coated areas until the coating has cured to "dry to handle ". November 2010 09960 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3.02 SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Comply with the applicable health and safety requirements of OSHA and the recommendations of the product manufacturer. 2. Provide and require the use of proper personal protective and life saving equipment for all persons visiting or working in or about the project site. B. Ventilate work areas to control potential exposure and hazard to workers and employees of the plant. 1. Ventilation System a. Furnish and install in accordance with these specifications. b. Modify as directed by the supplier of the equipment, to insure a safe working environment and provide complete removal of all solvent vapors. c. Equipment: Explosion proof, of industrial design, and of adequate capacity to reduce the concentration of air contaminants to the degree that a hazard to workers or employees of the plant does not exist. d. Size ventilation system to maintain air changes within the confined space per OSHA regulations. 2. Remove contaminated air, vapors, and other potential hazardous substances from the confined space. 3. Forced air ventilation during blast cleaning, abrasive removal, coating application, and curing is mandatory in confined spaces. C. Coating Application 1. When coatings are applied in confined areas, require all personnel directly exposed to coating vapors to wear OSHA approved air supplied hoods. 2. Paper dust masks or standard glasses are not acceptable protection. 3. During the mixing and application of coatings and paints, prohibit all flames, welding and smoking within fifty (50) feet of the work area. 4. Post "No Smoking" signs in appropriate places to warn visitors and workers of the no smoking area. D. Solvents 1. The solvents used with the specified protective coatings are explosive at low concentrations and are highly toxic to humans. 2. Because of toxicity, keep the maximum allowable concentration of vapor below the maximum safe concentration level as defined by OSHA. November 2010 09960 -11 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3. In addition, never exceed Lower Explosive Limit in the confined space. 4. Comply with all regulations, manufacturer's recommendations, and directives from the Owner, related to safety of personnel and the handling of the coating materials. E. Fire Extinguishers 1. Keep a minimum of two (2) ten pound (101b) ABC type fire extinguishers present in the work area whenever work is proceeding. 2. Train all personnel in the use of this type of fire extinguisher. F. Noise 1. Whenever the occupational noise exposure exceeds the maximum allowable sound level as set forth by OSHA regulations or the regional Air Pollution Control District, provide and require the use of approved ear protection devices. 2. General maximum sound levels for the project are defined as those which • will not affect routine facility or neighborhood activities. 3. Whenever levels are objectionable, or exceed these limits, adjust operations to reduce noise levels, as directed by the Construction Manager or the local agency of jurisdiction. G. Ladders, Scaffolding and Rigging 1. Design for their intended use. 2. Comply with all requirements of OSHA regulations. 3. Erect where requested by the Construction Manager to facilitate inspection and move to the locations requested by the Construction Manager. 4. Equip scaffolding with proper "outriggers ", cross bracing, handrails, ladders, and OSHA approved and tested planking. H. Follow carefully the manufacturer's recommendations, precautions, and warnings regarding the handling and use of specified cleaning and coating materials. 1. Coating materials may be irritating to the skin and eyes, and may cause an allergic reaction in certain persons. 2. When handling and mixing coatings and paints, require workers to wear proper protective clothing and equipment, including gloves, respirators and eye protection. 3. Identify flammability, toxicity, allergenic properties, and any other characteristic requiring field precautions and follow specific safety practices recommended by manufacturer. November 2010 09960 -12 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings Remove spent abrasives and other debris. Comply with requirements of all regulatory agencies for handling and disposing of such wastes. 3.03 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT A. Use coating equipment designed for application of the material specified and maintain in good working condition at all times. 1. Equip compressors with suitable traps and filters to remove water, dust and oils from the air. 2. Conduct blotter or white cloth tests in the presence of the Construction Manager at each start-up period or as deemed necessary by the Construction Manager. 3. Verify cleanliness of compressed air supply daily, or as deemed necessary by the Construction Manager. a. Direct a stream of air, without abrasive, from the blast nozzle onto a white blotter or cloth for twenty (20) seconds. b. If oil or water appears on the blotter or cloth, blow down all traps and separators until two (2) subsequent twenty (20) second tests show no further oil or water. c. Use a compressed air system capable of delivering a continuous nozzle pressure to achieve the required surface cleanliness and profile, typically 90 pounds per square inch (psi) minimum to each nozzle in operation. B. Compressed Supplied Breathing Air 1. For respiratory protection devices, meet Compressed Gas Association, Inc. Specification G -7 for Grade D breathing air. 2. Design and locate breathing air compressors to prevent entry of contaminated air into the air supply system. 3. Equip oil lubricated compressors with an in line air purification system that includes air - purifying absorbent beds and filters that remove water, dust particles, odors, oil, and other hydrocarbons. Also include carbon monoxide sensor and alarm. 4. Provide written certification that the breathing air supplied by the compressors has been tested and the air complies with Specification G -7 Grade D. 5. Proper position for the blast .nozzle is a perpendicular angle to the flat surface of the work to be blasted. November 2010 09960 -13 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3.04 LIMITATIONS ON THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Do not apply any coating outside the limits recommended by the manufacturer without written approval by the Construction Manager. B. Weather Condition Restrictions 1. Do not apply coating when the surrounding air temperature or the temperature of the surface to be painted is below forty five (45) degrees F or in excess of one hundred and twenty (120) degrees F. 2. Do not apply any coating when the temperature of the material to be applied is less than fifty (50) degrees F or more than one hundred (100) degrees F. 3. Do not apply any coating to wet, moist, or damp surfaces, or during snowy, rainy, foggy, or misty conditions, or when the relative humidity exceeds eighty five (85) percent, or when the ambient air temperature is less than five (5) degrees F above the dew point. 4. Do not apply any coating when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed eighty five (85) percent or that the ambient air temperature will drop below forty five (45) degrees F within eight (8) hours after the application of the coating. 5. Do not apply any coating when the surface temperature is expected to drop to less than 5 degrees F above the dew point within eight hours after application of coating. 6. Do not apply any coating when wind speed exceeds fifteen (15) miles per hour in the immediate coating area. C. The Construction Manager may require the Contractor to roll the coatings if high winds create the potential for damage to surrounding property by airborne paint particles. This does not reduce the Contractor's responsibility for any damage to property caused by blast cleaning or painting operations. 1. If above conditions are prevalent, delay or postpone the coating application work until conditions are favorable. 2. Anticipate dew or moisture condensation and if such conditions are prevalent, delay coating work until midmorning to be certain that the surfaces are dry. 3. Complete each day's coating work in time to permit the film sufficient drying time, per manufacturer's recommendations, and prior to subjecting coatings to potentially damaging climatic conditions. D. The Construction Manager may utilize psychrometers and other measuring gauges at the work site to monitor climatic conditions. Repair coatings damaged by a November 2010 09960 -14 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will 0 give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for O such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the O amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any 0 adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. 3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner's refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement. 14.03 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor's notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. if Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner's objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. AU rights reserved. Page 55 of 62 pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer's issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer's aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions: 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 14.04.A through D for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. EJCDC C -700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract Copyright © 2007 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved. Page 56 of 62 change in climatic conditions. As directed by the Construction Manager, restore coating to specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Contact the Construction Manager to schedule inspection and approval of prepared surfaces prior to each application of coating materials. 1. The Construction Manager may order the removal of any coatings applied by the Contractor prior to inspection and approval. 2. If so ordered by the Construction Manager, remove coatings, prepare surfaces, schedule inspection, obtain approval, and reapply coating. Perform work at no additional cost to the Owner. B. After blast cleaning and prior to application of coatings and paintings, clean the surfaces to be coated by air blowing with clean dry air, dusting, sweeping, or vacuuming to remove any residue from blasting as directed by the Owner. C. Remove and reapply any coating applied to an improperly prepared surface. Perform this work to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Follow the recommendations of the coating material manufacturer including the selection of application equipment, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. Address any conflicts between coating manufacturer's recommendations and requirements in this specification at the Pre - Construction Conference meeting and resolve at that time. E. Properly cure and clean any surface which will receive subsequent coating layers. Remove over spray from previous coats, dirt or dust accumulation, or scuff marks from worker traffic. F. Comply with SSPC PA -1 for all coating and painting application work. G. Stir and strain as required, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application. H. Use a different shade or tint (or as selected by Construction Manager) on succeeding coating or painting applications to indicate coverage. 1. Apply each coating evenly, free of sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. 2. Produce finished surfaces free from holidays, defects, or blemishes. I. Difficult Surfaces November 2010 09960 -15 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 1. Includes all interior steel surfaces, all welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts irregular surfaces. 2. Other difficult surfaces include, but are not limited to, welds, roof lap seams, nuts, bolts, ends and flanges of rafters, or other irregular shapes. 3. To insure complete coverage, brush coat the specified material per SSPC- PA 1, 6.6 Striping, 7.4.6 Application Method (Brush). 4. Brush coating in multiple directions to insure penetration and coverage. J. Thinners 1. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. 2. If thinning is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. 3. Do not reduce coating materials more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics. 4. Materials thinned to achieve proper application characteristics must still meet the specified minimum dry film thickness. 5. Do not use any coatings which have been so severely modified or thinned that their application would cause established VOC limits to be exceeded. Contractor is responsible for any fines, costs, required remedies, or legal action and costs which may result from exceeding VOC limits. K. Spraying 1. Hold the spray nozzle perpendicular and sufficiently close to surfaces being coated to avoid excessive evaporation of volatile constituent and loss of material into the air or the bridging of cracks and crevices. 2. Use a spray technique that will result in a film free of fog, spatter or over spray. 3. Reaching beyond limits of scaffold perimeter will not be permitted. 4. Remove all over spray as directed by the Construction Manager. 5. Approval of Contractor's over spray prevention procedures and Construction Manager's presence on project site does not free Contractor from responsibility for over spray. 6. Obtain Construction Manager's approval of procedures will be required prior to start of spray operations. L. Drying Time 1. Strictly observe manufacturer's printed instructions for drying time • between coats and time between applications of coats. November 2010 09960 -16 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 2. If the recommended minimum or maximum recoat time is violated, prepare the surface as directed by the coating manufacturer. M. Dry Film Thickness 1. Apply coating systems within the specified minimum /maximum range dry-film thickness as measured from above the peaks of the surface profile. 2. Measure per SSPC -PA -2 and correct for the magnetic effect of the surface profile. N. Cleaning Cast Iron 1. Clean per SSPC -SP1 by thorough scrubbing with stiff bristle brushes soaked in solvent. 2. Brush -off blast cleaning may be necessary in order to provide a minimum surface profile of 1.5 mils. 3. Once a 1.5 mil profile (or greater) is verified, hand or power tool clean (reference SSPC- SP2 /SP3) but do not use cleaning tools that burnish or smooth the natural roughness (profile) of the cast iron surface. 4. Remove any dust or other contaminants remaining after hand or power tool cleaning with dry, oil free compressed air or by vacuum cleaning. 5. It is not the intent to remove the annealing. 6. If the cast iron has bituminous coating, trace amounts may remain in the pours of the cast iron. O. Do not break down kits. Do not mix partial kits. P. Produce coating termination and transition details per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection 1. Materials and work are subject to inspection by the Construction Manager. Unless otherwise noted herein, the Owner will pay the cost of 3rd party inspection. 2. The Construction Manager may perform inspection of the surface preparation, abrasive blast cleaning, and application of the coating and painting systems. 3. Provide inspection equipment including that which may be operated by the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager may elect to use his own equipment. November 2010 09960 -17 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 4. Use quality assurance procedures and practices to monitor each phase of surface preparation, application and inspection throughout the duration of the project. Procedures or practices not specified may be utilized if they meet appropriate professional standards and are approved by the Construction Manager. 5. Owner's use of a third party to inspect the work does not reduce or alter Contractor's responsibility for the quality control, and quality assurance, or other requirements of the contract. 6. Work performed in the absence of the Construction Manger's inspection is at the risk of the Contractor. a. After written notice from the Construction Manager, the Contractor may be required to remove and replace the uninspected work. b. The entire cost of removal and replacement of uninspected work, including the cost of any materials furnished by the Owner and used in the work thus removed, is the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of whether or not the work removed is found to be defective. 7. Provide, as a minimum, 200 foot candles of illumination for all inspection. Comply with SSPC — Guide 12. 3.07 FINISH SCHEDULE A. Specific coating systems, colors and finishes for rooms, galleries, piping, equipment, and other items which are painted or have other finishes are specified in the following coating systems schedule. After approval of coatings, submit samples of the specified colors to the Construction Manager for final color approval using the appropriate finish coating. B. Unless otherwise specified in the coating system schedule, the word "interior" means the inside of a building or structure and the word "exterior" means outside exposure to weather elements. C. Finish according to the following GENERAL FINISH SCHEDULE: November 2010 09960 -18 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3.08 GENERAL FINISH SCHEDULE Surface System Color A. Equipment and Metal Appurtenances a. Interior UI -5 Match adjacent piping b. Exterior U -1 See Note 1 2. Equipment, immersed or high spray, unless — otherwise specified. a. Potable (NSF) E -1 See Note 1 ® b. Non - potable UI -5 See Note 1 3. Electrical switchgear panels, unit substations, See Division See Division 16 motor control centers, power transformers, 16 m distribution centers and relay panels; interior and exterior 4. Instrumentation panels, graphic indicating See Division See Division 16 panels, indicating and transmitting field panels, 16 unless stainless steel; interior or exterior 5. Existing electrical and instrumentation panels Uncoated not damaged by work in this contract 6. Existing electrical and instrumentation panels — damaged by work in this contract a. Interior E -3 Match Existing b. Exterior U -1 Match Existing B. Process Piping 1. Submerged iron or steel piping, appurtenant U1 -5 Match Existing hangers and supports, including galvanized (except stainless steel and non - ferrous) 2. Ferrous, non - ferrous and galvanized piping, — appurtenant hangers and supports, non - immersed, non - stainless steel a. Interior E -3 See Note 1 b. Exterior U -1 See Note 1 3. Plastic PVC and CPVC Piping — — a. Interior E -3 See Note 1 b. Exterior U -2 See Note 1 4. Flexible Tubing Uncoated — C. Miscellaneous Electrical November 2010 09960 -19 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings Surface System Color 1. Conduit, outlet and junction boxes, lighting See Division See Division 16 transformers, lighting communication and small 16 power panels, control stations, appurtenant hangers, trays, clamps and supports; interior and exterior 2. Existing conduit, outlet and junction boxes, — — lighting transformers, lighting, communication and small power panels, control stations, lagged ductwork, appurtenant hangers, clamps and supports on uncoated surfaces, unless otherwise specified a. Not damaged or modified by work in Uncoated — this contract b. Damaged or modified by work in this — — contract 1) Interior E -3 See Note 1 2) Exterior U -2 See Note 1 D. Concrete, Grout, Masonry, and Plaster — — 1. Structural concrete, exposed Uncoated — 2. Structural concrete, buried, immersed, non- Uncoated — corrosive environment, unless otherwise specified E. Existing Handrails, Gratings, Floor Plates, manhole — — Covers, and Hatches 1. Not damaged by work in this contract Uncoated — 2. Damaged by work in this contract a. Interior E -3 See Note 1 b. Exterior (non - walking surfaces) U -2 See Note 1 F. Other — — 1. Equipment and appurtenances which are made Uncoated — of fiberglass, plastic, rubber, including flexible hose, conduit, and plastic coated tubing, expect as specified 2. Buried, sleeve -type couplings, flanged pipe, M -1 See Note 1 couplings, valves, mechanical and electrical penetrations not encased in concrete, except as specified Notes: 1. Owner to select from manufacturer's color charts November 2010 09960 -20 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3.09 EXCLUSIONS • A. Do not prepare or coat the following items or surfaces: 1. Mortar coated pipe and fittings 2. Sacrificial anodes and support wires 3. Copper, brass 4. Name Plates 5. Fiberglass items B. Where surfaces specified as "not to be coated" are damaged, coated or otherwise do not comply with these Specifications, clean, repair or otherwise restore such surfaces to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.10 VENTILATION A. General Requirements 1. Use forced air ventilation at all times to effectively remove solvents for proper drying of coats on the interior containment structures. 2. Remove solvent vapors released during application and from the deposited film using explosion proof exhaust blowers, suction fans, or as an integral part of the dehumidification equipment. 3. Duct exhaust blowers or suction fans should be ducted to or from the bottom of the structure. B. Requirements for Potable Water Structures 1. Provide a minimum of seven (7) days continuous ventilation and /or dehumidification following application of the final coat on the interior surfaces before filling and disinfection potable water structures. 2. Remove completely all traces of solvent from coating or structure. 3. Provide forced air ventilation at a rate of at least one complete air change every four hours. Provide continuously during application of the interior coating for a minimum period of seven (7) days from the final interior coating application. 4. Temperature and humidity conditions above or below 70° F and 50 percent relative humidity may extend or shorten the curing time required. 5. If there is any doubt about the adequacy of the curing conditions, provide additional curing time with continued forced air ventilation and dehumidification (if required), as directed by the Construction Manager. 6. Maintain the exhaust blowers or suction fans in good working condition at all times during the final curing period. November 2010 09960 -21 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings • 3.11 FINAL CURE (INTERIOR LININGS) A. Follow manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Construction Manager. 1. Minimum Cure Time: Seven (7) days (168 hours) at a temperature of 70 degrees F at a relative humidity of 50 %. 2. Do not provide less than minimum cure time, unless recommended in writing by the manufacturer and approved by the Construction Manager. B. After completion of curing cycle, test the applied coating via a "solvent" or "hardness test ". 1. Verify to the Construction Manager that adequate curing has been achieved. 2. Perform "solvent" tests or "hardness" tests, including the solvent and number of double -rubs, recommended by coating manufacturer. C. Solvent Wipe Test 1. Verify completion of the final cure. 2. Use a rubbing a cloth saturated with solvent as recommended by manufacturer on the area to be tested. 3. If the area tested becomes tacky, the coating is not fully cured. a. Extend the curing period until the coating is fully cured to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager. b. Test per ASTM D 5402. D. If final cure has not been attained, based on tests described above, extend the curing time until applied coating passes the "double rub solvent test" per manufacturer's instructions. 3.12 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Color code pipe as specified. 1. Location of Identification a. Lettering, flow direction arrows and color bands. b. Near equipment served. c. Adjacent to valves. d. At each branch, tee or change in direction. e. At both sides where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. f. Spacing interval on straight runs: 1) Lettering and arrows at not more than 50 FT. 2) Color bands at not more than 25 FT g. Arrows to indicate direction of flow. h. Band sizing: 1 IN minimum. B. Metal Tags 1. Stainless steel, engraved. November 2010 09960 -22 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 2. Provide and install 2 IN square name and identification number tags for each valve. a. Engineer to provide identification names. b. Contractor to number valves and provide valve chart. c. Include number shown on Drawings for automatically controlled valves. C. Lettering 1. Use pressure- sensitive adhesive vinyl lettering. Use Gerber High Performance Series 220 premium film, or equal. 2. Letter size as follows: Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters %IN -11/4 IN 'A IN 1 '/2 1N to 2 IN % IN 2 '/2 IN to 6 IN 1 1/4 IN 8 IN to 10 IN 2 '/2 IN 3. Clearly visible from a normal line of vision. 3.13 INSPECTION AND 1'EST1NG A. Perform inspection and testing as specified. Include additional inspection, sampling and testing work that the Construction Manager may require to verify compliance with these Specifications. B. Notify the Construction Manager three (3) working days in advance of any field operations involving abrasive blast cleaning or coating applications. C. Assistance to Construction Manager 1. Coordinate work with the inspection, sampling and testing requirements of the Construction Manager 2. Assist the Construction Manager as required for the performance of duties. 3. Provide all lighting and scaffolding to enable the Construction Manager to perform inspection and testing. 4. Provide the level of illumination and scaffolding locations for inspection purposes as directed by the Construction Manager. 5. Furnish Construction Manager with safety equipment and devices during abrasive blast cleaning, coating and painting operations. Provide a helmet with continuous fresh air supply for observation during cleaning operations and coating application. November 2010 09960 -23 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings D. The Construction Manager will perform such tests as are required to help ensure compliance with all phases of the surface preparation, and application of the coating systems. Provide test equipment including, but not be limited to the following: SSPC surface preparation standards; surface profile test tape; micrometer; abrasive sieve test; ultraviolet lamp; sling psychrometer; mirror; certified thickness calibration plates; magnetic type dry film thickness gage; and a nondestructive holiday detector. E. Inspection by the Construction Manager does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of compliance with all the requirements of these specifications. 1. In cases of dispute concerning surface profiles, film thickness, film continuity (holidays), etc., the Construction Manager's measurements and tests shall be final. Abide by the Construction Manager's decisions and directives. 2. Correct deficiencies in the continuity of the coating, or painting film or in the dry film thickness by applying additional coats as required, at the sole expense of the Contractor. F. The Construction Manager will determine the degree and surface profile of the field blast cleaned surface per test method NACE RP0287. Perform additional blast cleaning over areas not conforming to the specified degree of surface preparation and surface profile. G. Perform tests on surfaces of abrasively blast - cleaned steel to detect oil and other contaminants which might be deposited on surfaces as a result of abrasive blasting operations. This may include chemical tests or ultraviolet (black light) tests, as required. H. Perform all mixing, thinning, application and holiday detection of coatings in the presence of the Construction Manager. The Construction Manager may completely inspect each application of coating to determine thickness and integrity. 1. Each coating application will be checked and deficiencies marked. 2. After observing specified recoat time apply additional coating materials over areas not having the specified minimum dry film thickness and areas having any holidays or pinholes. 3. After correction of deficiencies, the Construction Manager will re inspect those areas to determine the acceptability of the additional coating. 4. Each coating application must be one hundred (100) percent to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager prior to proceeding with successive coating applications. J. Dry Film Thickness Measurement 1. Use an approved magnetic type non destructive dry film thickness gauge. 2. Determine that the specified dry film thickness has been obtained. November 2010 09960 -24 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 3. Measure specified dry film thickness' above the peaks of the surface profile. 4. Perform as many dry film thickness measurements, as described in SSPC — PA2, as required to verify compliance with this specification. Use a Type 11 Constant Pressure Probe Dry Film Thickness Gauge. K. Furnish calibrated inspection devices in good working condition for detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thickness. 1. Calibrate and operated per manufacturer's instructions. 2. Furnish U.S. Department of Commerce; National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibrated plates to test the accuracy of dry film thickness gauges and certified instrumentation to test the accuracy of holiday detectors. 3. Keep dry film thickness gauges and holiday detectors available onsite at all times until final acceptance of the application. L. Construction Manager may elect to furnish inspection devices and render decisions based solely upon test results from these devices. M. For coating film continuity detection tests on interior structure coated surfaces with 20 mils or less dry film thickness, use a non destructive holiday detector. 1. Provide personnel to operate coating film continuity detection devices under the direction of the Construction Manager. 2. Operate inspection devices per the manufacture's recommendations in accordance with NACE SPO188. N. Test the coating integrity of the interior surfaces below the overflow line. 1. Mark all pinholes and repair manufacturer's written recommendations, or as directed by the Construction Manager; and then retest. 2. Holidays or other irregularities are not permitted in the completed coating system. 3. During the testing, keep the detecting blade in continuous contact with the coated surface. 4. Do not proceed with holiday detection until the completed coating system has been cured per the manufacturer's recommendations. 0. Upon completion of the epoxy application to the interior structure surfaces, retest for holidays those areas of the lower shell which may have been subjected to abrasive blast rebound from the floor, repaired as noted herein. Repair areas as required and retest. P. Measure anchor profile for prepared surfaces using a non destructive instrument such as a Testex Press 0 Film System. Q. The Construction Manager will verify completion of the final cure of the interior lining using a solvent wipe test. November 2010 09960 -25 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings 1. Solvent wipe test: Consists of rubbing a solvent saturated rag on the area to be tested per ASTM D 5402, using solvent recommended by manufacturer. 2. If any coating material is removed or the surface being tested becomes tacky, the coating is not fully cured. Extend curing time and if required continue dehumidification until the coating is fully cured. R The Construction Manager may suspend the work if the cleaning and coating operations of the Contractor are creating a localized condition detrimental to facility operation, personnel or adjacent property. In the event of an intermittent or emergency suspension of the work by the Construction Manager, correct deficiencies immediately. S. Prepare, sign, and submit to the Construction Manager daily inspection reports. T. Nonconformance Reports 1. When a nonconformance report is required, prepare, sign, and submit to the Construction Manager within one working day from the time that it is written. 2. After confirming that all non - conforming work has been corrected and /or the coating work is in compliance with this specification, prepare and submit a conformance verification report shall be completed for the specific item or area. 3. This report must be signed by the inspector. 3.14 FINAL CLEANUP A. Leave all areas in a neat and presentable condition. B. Remove rubbish, construction debris and waste, surplus construction materials, scaffolding, tools, equipment, and coating, and thinner containers, and excess coating, and thinners, and other objectionable materials. C. Dispose of such materials away from the site of work and in conformance with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations. D. Remove coating spots upon adjacent surfaces. E. Clean, repair or refinish all damage to surfaces resulting from the work. 3.15 WARRANTY INSPECTION A. Warranty: See Paragraph 1.07. B. Conduct a warranty inspection of all coating and painting work between the period of eleventh (11th) month through eighteenth (18th) month following final acceptance of the Contract work. C. The Construction Manager will establish the date for the inspection and will notify the Contractor at least 30 days in advance. The Construction Manager may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date November 2010 09960 -26 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings • within the eleventh through eighteenth month inspection period, or may cancel the warranty period altogether. D. Attendance 1. Attend the warranty inspection. 2. Notifying all directly involved parties of the date and time of the inspection. 3. The Construction Manager suggests all personnel present at the pre - construction conference be present at this inspection. E. Preparation 1. The Owner will completely drain each vessel and hose clean the interior sufficiently for inspection. 2. Provide (Contractor) suitable lighting, ventilation and scaffolding for the structure inspection. 3. Use SSPC —Guide 12 for Illumination, and provide a minimum of 200 candle foot illumination for inspection. F. Inspect visually the entire interior and exterior coating systems to determine whether any repair work is necessary or if a more detailed inspection will be needed. G. Inspection Report 1. The Construction Manager will prepare and deliver to the Contractor an Inspection Report. a. The report will cover the warranty inspection, setting forth the number and types of failures observed, the percentage of the surface area where failure has occurred, and the names of the persons making the inspections. b. Color photographs illustrating each type of failure will be included in the report. c. A coating system failure is defined as any location where coatings have peeled off, bubbled, or cracked, and any location where rusting is evident. d. Upon completion of inspection and receipt of Inspection Report, the Construction Manager will establish a date for the Contractor to proceed with remedial work. H. Commence repairs on the date established by the Construction Manager and completed within one month (thirty days). 1. Repair all coating system failures. a. Remove the deteriorated coating, clean the surface and recoat with the same coating system in strict accordance with the specification and manufacturer's recommendations, to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager. November 2010 09960 -27 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Perfonnance Coatings b. If the area of failure exceeds twenty five (25) percent of the area of a portion of the structures surface, then remove the entire coating system and recoat that surface. All costs for warranty inspection are the responsibility of the Contractor. Additional inspection and all costs for repair are the responsibility of the Contractor. I. If the contractor fails to complete the remedial work to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager, the Owner may elect to perform the remedial work. The Contractor is liable for actual cost of all such remedial work, plus 20% for Owner's administrative cost. J. Perform final cleanup in accordance with this Section. END OF SECTION November 2010 09960 -28 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 High Performance Coatings SECTION 11088 AERATION EQUIPMENT: FINE BUBBLE TYPE PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Additional diffusers and modified grid for Cell 5 of Aeration Basin 4. 2. Equipment to form a complete aeration system within basin including, but not limited to: a. Fine - bubble diffusers. b. Adjustable pipe supports. c. Air piping reaction anchorage. d. Air piping expansion provisions. e. Anchor bolts, and epoxy anchors. 3. Aeration system manufacturer responsibility includes complete system from connection to existing air manifold. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. A193, Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High- Temperature Service b. D2241, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series) B. Qualifications 1. All equipment shall be supplied by a single Manufacturer or Supplier. 2. Supplier to have substantial experience in manufacture of membrane diffuser equipment. 3. Supplier to provide with first submittal a list of three membrane disk installations that have operated for a minimum of three years continuously. November 2010 11088 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. See Section 01300. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Fabrication and /or layout drawings. a. Diffusers 1) Manufacturer 2) Materials of construction. 3) Type and model. 4) Dimensional information. 5) Stable airflow rate range and corresponding headloss. 6) Oxygen transfer efficiency (clean water) for design airflow range for each grid. 7) Mounting arrangement. 8) Mounting instructions. b. Air Distribution System 1) Dimensional information including size and spacing of all piping, Drawings to scale. 2) Materials of construction. 3) Joint restraint. 4) Expansion compensation. 5) Pipe support details including layout for laterals 6) Installation instructions. 7) Engineering calculations. a) Thrusts due to pressurized pipes. b) Forces due to expansion of pipes. c) Forces on pressurized pipe due to sudden loss of air pressure. d) Buoyancy calculations. e) Temperature of pipe walls for site conditions in air distribution piping. f) Ability of piping system to withstand lateral forces. g) Headloss calculations. (Diffusers to top of dropleg over the air flow range specified). h) Performance curves. (Headloss versus diffuser airflow over the air flow range specified). i) Verification that airflow per diffuser will not vary more than +/- 5% from the average airflow per November 2010 11088 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type diffuser within a grid at maximum and minimum airflow. 4. Warranty Statement B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1. See Section 01730. C. Certificate of Proper Installation 1. Provide Manufacturers Installation Certification Form. See Section 01999. 1.04 WARRANTY A. All aeration equipment components, and accessories to be free of defects in materials, workmanship, and installation for a period of one year from date of Final Acceptance in writing and signed jointly by Manufacturer and CON I'RACTOR PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Sanitaire/Water Pollution Control Corporation, "Silver Series 2." 2. Environmental Dynamics, Inc., Flexair Disc Diffuser. 3. Or- equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Diffusers 1. Diffuser Membrane a. High grade material suitable for service warranty specified b. Integral sealing gasket. c. Precision die formed slits. d. Uniform distribution of air bubble release across the active surface of element. e. Membrane to collapse and seal when aeration system air is turned off. f. EPDM with carbon black for UV protection meeting the following specifications: 1) Membrane Thickness: 0.080 inch minimum. November 2010 11088 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type • 2) Durometer: 58 + 5, Shore A per ASTM 2240 maximum. 3) Unperforated Tensile Strength: 1,200 psi minimum. 4) Accelerated Aging. a) Maximum compression Set: 20% @ 23° C for 22 hours; 40% @ 70° C for 22 hours per ASTM D395. b) Maximum Elongation: 75% retained @ 70° C for 22 hours per ASTM D573. 5) Maximum Elongation at Break: 350% per ASTM D412. 6) Dynamic Wet Pressure: 8.0 "- 12.0" W.C. @ 1.0 SCFM @ 2" W.C. submergence. 7) Backflow leakage Rate: Zero water after 48 hours with no air pressure. 2. Diffuser Holder a. PVC or glass filled polypropylene b. Air plenum chamber below diffuser support plate. c. Complete peripheral edge support for membrane. d. Membrane retainer device: 1) Prevents air escape at diffuser element - sealing gasket interface. 2) Method to vary applied sealing force between sealing gasket and membrane diffuser that generates a minimum of 50 pounds per inch of circumference of the sealing gasket. e. Free of loose or unbonded material, cracks, chips, spalling or other structural defects. B. Air Piping 1. General • a. Design to resist thrust generated by expansion and contraction of the piping system. b. Piping to provide even and balanced distribution of air throughout basins. 2. Air Distribution Lateral Piping and Fittings a. Provide from existing manifold. b. Nominal diameter: 4 inches minimum. c. Provide 4 inch diameter stub connection from the existing manifold to each new distribution header. d. Unplasticized PVC conforming to ASTM 3034 or 2241, SDR 26 with a minimum of 2 percent T added to PVC resin. e. Fittings 1) Pressure rating to match pressure rating pipes. 2) EPDM joint gaskets. November 2010 11088 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type f. Maximum pipe length: 24 feet g. Provide PVC fixed union or flange joints between each diffuser distribution lateral section. h. Diameter changes using eccentric reducers. 3. Pipe Supports a. General 1) Securely anchor headers, manifolds, and distribution laterals to tank floor and walls. 2) Pipe supports, anchor bolts, expansion anchors, saddles, hold down clamps, and accessories: Stainless steel AISI 304 or 304L if shop welding is required for fabrication. b. Each support to include: 1) Supporting base to tank floor. 2) Cradle or saddle. 3) Adjusting and locking mechanism. 4) Hold down clamps: Two -piece 14 GA minimum 2 inches wide, contoured to fit the full 360 DEG of the pipe. c. Supporting Base: Secured to floor with stainless steel adhesive anchor bolts: 1) Minimum diameter for laterals: '/2 inch. 2) Minimum diameter for manifolds: 5/8 inch. 3) Provide lock nuts as shown on Drawings. Lock nuts to be Nilock, or- equal. d. Supports: Include mechanism for vertical and angular alignment adjustment. e. Hold down anchor bolt uplift safety factor: 10 minimum. f. As shown on drawings. g. Manifold Supports 1) Add additional supports to existing diffuser manifold as needed to continue meeting support requirements with the additional distribution laterals. 2) Provide manifold supports, of stainless steel, as previously specified. 3) Manifold supports shall include manifold hold down strap (U -bolt or equal), cross -tree and supporting structure. November 2010 11088 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type h. Distribution Lateral Piping Supports 1) Furnish guide supports that allow longitudinal movement of the distribution header to allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the lateral. 2) Provide positive type connection joints of flanged or threaded union type. Bell and spigot, slip -on, or expansion type joints shall not be used for submerged joints. All joints must be positive locking type and prevent horizontal or rotational movement of piping. 2.03 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of Service 1. Elevation at jobsite: 160 feet MSL. 2. Ambient air temperature: -0° F to 100° F. 3. Ambient atmospheric pressure: 14.7 psia. 4. Aerator air temperatures: 150° F to 250° F. B. Design Criteria 1. Provide equipment for improvements to one aeration cell in one aeration basin as shown according to the following criteria: a. Side water depth: 19.5 feet. b. Minimum diffuser submergence: 18.75 feet. C. Diffusers 1. Membrane Disc. 2. Diameter: 9 inches. D. Allowable diffuser flow range: 0.5 -4.0 SCFM per installed diffuser. E. Number of new distribution headers (diffuser laterals), diffusers and air flow rates per aeration basin cell: No. of New Diffuser No. of New Total No. of New Total Additional Cell Distribution Laterals Diffusers Per Diffusers Air Flow No. Lateral Installed (SCFM) 5 3 35 105 52.5 - 420 November 2010 11088 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type F. Maximum pressure at top of dropleg all cells: static liquid level over membrane plus 1.0 psig at the maximum airflow per installed diffuser specified above. G. Air Distribution System 1. Dropleg pipe diameter: As show on Drawings. 2. Air distribution manifold diameter: As show on Drawings. 3. Diffuser distribution header (diffuser lateral) pipe diameter: 4 inches minimum. 4. Pipe support spacing main pipes, headers, and manifolds: 8 feet -0 inches maximum. 5. Pipe support spacing 4 inches pipes: 7 feet -6 inches maximum. 6. 4 inches PVC and CPVC wall thickness: SDR 26, minimum. 7. Air distribution piping system capable of withstanding a minimum lateral force of 10 lb /SF. PART 3 — EXECUTION 2.01 INSTALLATION CHECKS A. For all equipment specifically required in detailed specifications, secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized representative(s) of equipment manufacturer to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve equipment installation. In each case, representative(s) shall be present during placement and startup of equipment and as often as necessary to resolve any operational issues, which may arise. B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a written report certifying that equipment: 1. Has been properly installed and lubricated. 2. Is in accurate alignment. • 3. Is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor • bolts. • 4. Has been operated under full Load conditions and that it operated • satisfactorily. Secure and deliver a field written report to OWNER • immediately prior to leaving jobsite. • C. All or any time expended during installation check does not qualify as O &M • training or instruction time when specified. • • • November 2010 11088 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type • D. For aeration system equipment, assemble in factory to ensure proper fit. Mark parts with erection marks, disassemble for shipment. E. Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions: 1. Do not use power tools to secure orifice bolts, clamps, or retaining rings. 2. Use calibrated torque wrenches that slip when set torque is exceeded. F. Pipe Supports and Tie Downs 1. Sliding support: As required to compensate for expansion /contraction. G. Diffuser Leveling 1. Installed within plus or minus 1 /4 inch of common horizontal plane. 2. Check installation elevation by filling basin to top of diffusers. 3. Adjust elevations as required. H. Cleaning 1. Clean all piping to remove visible dirt, dust, and other matter before starting system or installing diffusers. 2. Do not use process air compressors for air cleaning. 3. Air furnished by CONTRACTOR. 2.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Provide test equipment, tools, and instruments necessary to accomplish equipment testing. 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform installation checks and field- • testing. • 5. Provide one four -hour training session. • 6. Provide OWNER with a written Certificate of Proper Installation that • manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, has been started up, • and is ready for operation by OWNER's personnel. Include results of benchmark pressure test. • • • • • November 2010 11088 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type • • 2.03 FIELD TESTING A. All testing and remedial action shall be done at the CON1'RACTOR's expense. B. Pipe Support Anchor Testing 1. First test provided by OWNER. 2. 10 percent of each type tested for resistance to buoyant forces. 3. Test force: Factor of safety of 10 based on calculated buoyant forces. 4. Replace all supports failing test. 5. Retest, if necessary, until 100 percent of each type successfully pass test. Retest at Contractor's expense. C. Air Leakage Tests 1. Perform after leveling. 2. Fill basins with treated plant effluent 3 inches over top of diffusers. 3. Release 80 percent of maximum airflow rate through diffusers for a minimum 5 minutes period. 4. Visually check and photograph each basin to ensure: a. Uniformity of air distribution throughout basin. b. Uniformity of air distribution across face of each diffuser. c. Absence of leaks in piping and appurtenances. d. Check all piping above water level with soapsuds solution. e. Repair all leaks. f. Repair system components to ensure complete uniformity of air distribution. END OF SECTION • • • • November 2010 11088-9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Aeration Equipment: Fine Bubble Type • (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 0 • • 0 U 0 0 0 SECTION 11105 FABRICATED STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Slide gates fabricated from stainless steel. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Design Head (Seating or Unseating): The hydrostatic head representing the differential pressure that the gate is to be designed to withstand and for which the actuator is sized to accommodate. B. Seal: Resilient material attached to the slide plate or the gate frame that function to prevent leakage. C. Seat: The horizontal and vertical bearing surfaces that support the slide plate that function to prevent leakage. D. Slenderness Ratio (L/R): The ratio of maximum unsupported stem length to stem cross - section radius of gyration. E. Self- contained: The arrangement of gate actuator, supported by the gate frame, such that the operating thrust loads are not applied to the gate assembly. F. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene monomer. G. RMS: Root Mean Square. H. UHMWPE: Ultra high molecular weight polyethylene. • 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Standard: Provide slide gates conforming to AWWA C 561. B. Design slide gate in accordance with the performance requirements specified below and to withstand the seating and unseating head conditions specified in the Gate Schedule provided at the end of this Section. • 1. Ultimate and Yield Tensile, Compressive and Shear Strength Criteria: • a. Apply safety factor of 4.0 with regard to ultimate tensile, compressive and shear strength. b. Apply safety factor of 2.0 with regard to tensile, compressive and shear yield strength. November 2010 11105 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 2. Slide Plate and Frames a. Minimum thickness of structural members: 1 /4 -inch. b. Slide Plate Deflection: Not more than 1/360 of the plate span, ore 1/8 -inch, whichever is less, at the specified maximum hydraulic head. 3. Seat and Seals: Seat contact pressure shall not exceed 600 psi at the design head. 4. Guides: Minimum material thickness shall be 1/4 —inch. 5. Yoke a. Sized to withstand the torque and thrust of the actuator when a 40 pound force is applied to the handwheel or handcrank. 1) Electrically Operated Slide Gates: Meet the requirement above in addition to a design safety factor of 1.5 with regard to yield strength at the locked -rotor torque of the actuator. b. Yoke Deflection: Not greater than 1/360 of gate width at the maximum operating load. 6. Stem Connection a. Design Load for Manual Actuators: The output thrust when a 40 pound effort is applied to the handwheel or handcrank. b. Design Load for Electric Actuators: 1.25 times the output thrust developed in the motor - locked rotor torque condition. 7. Stem Guides a. The stem guides shall be bushed with a maximum diametral clearance of 1/8. 8. Stem Connection at Slide Plate: Design connection using specified stem sizing criteria. 9. Structural members forming the yoke: Size to accommodate the loads developed by the gate operating device as determined by the stem sizing calculations. 10. Stem Sizing Criteria: Select and provide the largest stem diameter determined by the following calculations: a. Buckling Load Criteria: The critical buckling load shall be determined using the Euler Column Formula with a C value of 2. b. Manually Operated Gates/ Electric Motor Actuator in Manual Mode: Tensile and Compressive Loads: The tension and compression operating load conditions shall be as follows: 1) Loads created by the application of a 40 pound force on the handwheel or hand crank. Apply a safety factor of 2.0 to tension load calculations. November 2010 11105 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 2) Loads created by a 50 foot -pound torque applied to the operating nut. Apply a safety factor of 2.0 to compressive load calculations. 3) Under both conditions, determine stem diameter that will not exceed one -fifth of the ultimate tensile strength of the stem material. c. Electric Actuated Gates: Determine stem diameters required to a stem design force not less than 1.25 times the output thrust of the unit in the stalled motor condition. C. Allowable Leakage Limits 1. Seating and Unseating Head Installations: Leakage not to exceed 0.10 gallons per minute per foot of seating perimeter. D. Sizing Criteria for Gate Actuators: In accordance with AWWA C561. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard catalog data, descriptive literature, parts list and specifications describing system components. B. Shop Drawings 1. Certified drawings indicating principal dimensions, general construction of the assembly and materials of construction. 2. Detailed structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings showing equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment. 3. Mounting details for each type of mounting configuration used. 4. External utility requirements such as air, water, power, and drain for each component. 5. Functional description of internal and external instrumentation and controls to be supplied including list of parameters monitored, controlled, or alarmed. 6. Mounting details and connections to the electric gate actuator. 7. Power and control wiring diagrams, including wiring terminal numbers. 8. Contractor's field performance test procedures. C. Design Data 1. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. November 2010 11105 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 2. Gate operator and stem sizing calculations for each gate and service condition. Show equations used and identify variables and design factors. 3. Calculated gate deflection under maximum specified hydraulic loading condition. D. Test Reports: Submit results of factory leakage test. E. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's instructions, requirements and detailed drawings for installation of slide gates and actuators. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01730. G. Certificate of Proper Installation 1. Provide Manufacturers Installation Certification Form. See Section 01999. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Slide Gate Manufacturer: Minimum of 5 years full time experience in manufacturing fabricated slide gates in compliance with AWWA C561. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Avoid warping gate frame and maintain tolerances between seating faces. B. Self - contained Slide Gates: Ship as a fully assembled unit, complete and ready for installation, except electric actuators and hydraulic cylinders shall be shipped separately and installed in the field. C. Ship slide gates that are not in a self - contained arrangement in components and assemble in the field. Pack gate stems in sturdy wood crates and bolt slide plates and frames securely to wood skids to protect unit and to provide safe handling. Package and ship actuator separately. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Golden Harvest, Inc. 2. Fontaine, Ltd. 3. Hydro Gates LLC. November 2010 11105 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 4. Whipps, Inc 2.02 MATERIALS A. Slide Gates Structural Members: Thimble, Frame, Slide Plate, Guides and Yoke: ASTM A240 or ASTM A276, Type 304L/316L Stainless Steel. B. Lift Nut: ASTM B584 bronze. C. Flush -Bottom Sill: Extruded or molded neoprene. Reclaimed rubber as described in ASTM D2000 shall not be used. D. Flush -Bottom Sill Retainer: Stainless Steel ASTM A276. E. Actuator Pedestal or Gear Housing: Stainless Steel ASTM A36/ A36M. F. Gears: Steel, AISI 8620, AISI 4140 or AISI 1117. G. Thrust Nut: 1. Rising Stem Type Slide Gates: ASTM A276, Type 304/316 stainless steel, or ASTM B584 bronze. 2. Non - rising Stem Type Slide Gates: ASTM B584 bronze. H. Seat: UHMWPE in accordance with ASTM D4020. I. Seal: In accordance with AWWA C561. J. Stems and Stem Couplers: ASTM A276 Type 304/316 Stainless Steel. K. Stem Guide Bushings: Cast/Extruded UHMWPE ASTM D4020. L. Bolts, Studs, Fasteners and Anchor Bolts: ASTM A276 Type 304/316 Stainless Steel. Adhesive anchors per Section 05501. 2.03 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES A. Designed and fabricated in accordance with AWWA C561. B. Slide Plate 1. Comprised of a single flat stainless steel plate reinforced as required to meet the specified design criteria for deflection. November 2010 11105 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates C. Slide Plate Guides 1. Comprised of structural members welded to form a rigid, one -piece frame designed to mount directly on a concrete wall or within a channel. 2. Vertical Guides: a. Self - contained Gates: Design to extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for supporting the yoke. Size vertical guides to retain the slide plate and to withstand forces generated by the gate operating mechanism. b. Gates not Self - contained: Design to extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for supporting at least 2/3 of the slide plate height when the gate is in the full open position. Size vertical guides to retain the slide plate and to withstand forces generated by the gate operating mechanism. c. Guide Slot Depth: Minimum 1 inch. d. Guide Slot Liners: Incorporate replaceable UHMWPE bearing strips on both sides of the guide slot. D. Yoke 1. Formed by structural members welded to the vertical guides. 2. Location Relative to Operating Floor: a. Minimum Height of Yoke: 3 feet 6 inches above the operating floor. b. Maximum Height of Yoke: High enough above the operating floor to allow the bottom of the upward acting slide plate to be raised above the maximum water surface elevation when the gate is in the full up position. E. Stem, Stem Guides and Operating Nut 1. Diameter as required to meet specified sizing criteria, minimum 1.25 -inch diameter. 2. Stem shall be threaded to allow full travel of the slide unless the travel distance is otherwise shown on the Drawings. 3 Threads shall be machine cut and rolled type threads with RMS surface roughness of 20 micro - inches or less. 4. Threaded portion of stem shall engage a square operating nut on the slide. 5. Operating Nut: a. Constructed of bronze. b. Internally threaded with cut or cold rolled Acme threads corresponding to stem threading. November 2010 11105 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 6. Use stem couplers with internal threads when stems are made up of more than one section. Hold coupler in place with bolts or with key and keyway. 7. Stem Guides: Split, bronze bushed, adjustable in two directions to properly align stem. a. Anchor bolts for stem guide brackets: Type 304/316 stainless steel. 2.04 SLIDE GATE ACTUATORS A. Gates with yokes located above the maximum specified distance above the operating floor: 1. Design gate actuation system with right angle gear drive, drive shaft, sprockets, and chain such that the gate actuator (handwheel, hand crank, or • motorized actuator) is between 36 inches and 48 inches above the operating floor. B. Manual Gate Operators: Provide handcrank type operators meeting requirements of AWWA C561 pertaining to manual lifting devices. 1. Hand Crank Operators: a. Constructed of fabricated steel, cast iron, or aluminum. b. Geared type designed to allow operation of gate under the specified design hydraulic head condition with a maximum effort of 40 pound pull on the handcrank. c. Enclose gears and bearings in a weatherproof housing with pressure fittings for grease lubrication. d. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball thrust or tapered, located below and above operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. e. Gearing: Accurately machined to provide smooth operation. f. Crank Handles: Removable from the operator. g . Mount to gate frame as shown on drawings 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication 1. Workmanship: a. Conform to design dimensions with bolt holes accurately drilled to match mounting pattern. b. Free from defects, burrs, grease and dirt. 2. Tolerances: Within 1/8 -inch of square, flatness and dimensional tolerances. November 2010 11105 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates 3. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.6. Welds free of slag, weld splatter and discoloration from heat. 2.06 QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Perform leakage test under the specified hydrostatic design conditions. Measure and report leakage. B. Verification of Operation: Operate slide gate from fully closed to fully open to verify proper operation. C. Gates are to be fully factory assembled before shipment to ensure proper operation. Gates may be disassembled after testing for ease of shipment, however gate components shall be properly labeled for reliable contractor assembly upon arrival. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install slide gates in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Accurately place anchor bolts using the anchor locations shown on the manufacturer's certified drawings. C. Gate Mounting: Plumb, shimmed as necessary, and accurately aligned. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct functional testing on each gate. If necessary, adjust, align or modify units for proper operation and re -test. B. Conduct leakage tests on slide gates when factory leakage tests are specified in the Gate Schedule. Subject gates to the design head conditions specified. C. Corrective Actions: Replace or repair to eliminate defects, deficiencies and irregularities. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Provide field inspection of installed slide gates to confirm proper installation and to conduct functional testing. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 2. Assist Contractor in undertaking field leakage tests, when such tests are specified. 3. Provide instruction to Owner's operations and maintenance personnel consisting of one, 4 -hour training session. November 2010 11105 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates B. Schedule and Timing 1. Schedule site attendance by manufacturer's representative when appropriate based on the progress of the work. 2. Timing: Minimum time spent at the project site, not including travel time: a. 1 day for inspection and functional testing. b. 4 hours for training of Owner's personnel. C. Reports: Submit certification that gates have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and properly operate. 3.04 SCHEDULE A. The Gate Schedule provided following "End of Section" is part of this Specification. November 2010 11105 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates SLIDE GATE SCHEDULE r`'�. 5x - , a ,» :.s;Gte ennl �` 3 — .. $ e . x `"" ; 8 e . a. ` —' - +�*� • . a s, 5 . �k , Devi 04*, Head feet f � Testm G s > �, m �?� �,. *,r :. s. �... 1klountin � O Opening Invert m , � � ) � - Actuator � i ; a; = s . Fr Gate T e � "Width x� g P g fr, 4 . � _ rN .� G YP a . • 7 T `'-Re ments Y y =Number • �. �.,�, - �,;m � � .. ArrRn g ement . ` ., D irection , .; Y ,Ele�ation��� � <�`�� � �'� �x a Type ., uire 9 �t�.� ��,,�t� n .qf ..HeiOpht ( inches _.,_. >m, NP s, €': $ + a i. Fd ".. .. ,b-. ^\ .� ,," _ _ vff ti c:, 'uw a " & 4 .' •. w: x ry � a� � s - 4,,. ... ` . +. �`°�' ,Y` a "�,3'r .�,. e i "'"" � -�"_., � :r: �. > ;. ¢., tSeatin n, Unseatm iFactory F 06G40119 Self- contained 36 x 120 C -S U 155.00 10 10 HC YES YES open -close service Legend: Mounting Arrangement: WM = wall mount, C -E = in- channel with embedded frame, C -S = in- channel with surface mounted frame Opening Direction: U = opens in an upward direction, D = opens in a downward direction Actuator Type: HW = handwheel, HC = hand crank, EM = electric motor driven, * Contractor to field verify all dimensions. END OF SECTION November 2010 11105 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates • SECTION 13400 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS (PICS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards that may be referenced in this Section: 1. Instrument Society of America. (ISA): a. S5.1, Instrumentation Symbols and Identification (NRC ADOPTED). b. PR12.6, Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) Locations. c. S50.1, Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Industrial Process Instruments. d. RP55.1, Hardware Testing of Digital Process Computers, Recommended Practice. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): NEMA 250 -85, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 3. Underwriters Laboratory Inc. (UL): UL 508, Standards for Safety, Industrial Control Equipment. 4. Deutsche Industrie -Norm (DIN), VDE 0611, Specification for modular terminal blocks for connection of copper conductors up to 1,000V ac and up to 1,200 V dc. . 5. National Fire Code, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 820, Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment Plants. 1.02 SUMMARY A. PICS Subcontractor: Use PICS Subcontractor to implement the PICS and PICS Subsystems. The PICS Subcontractor's work shall directly include the PICS and all PICS Subsystems. The PICS and PICS Subsystems shall be the responsibility of the PICS Subcontractor. B. Related Sections: This Section gives general requirements for the Process Instrumentation and Control System (PICS). The following Section expands on the requirements of this PICS Section. Subsystems specified by these sections are referred to as PICS Subsystems. 1. Section 13442, PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS (PET). 2. Section 16040, IDENI'ThICATION. November 2010 13400 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems C. Work Includes: Furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing, documenting, starting up, and OWNER training for a complete Process Instrumentation and Control System. Major parts are: 1. Terminations in existing Aeration Basin 4 Air Flow X Mtrs Junction Box and Aeration Basin 4 Light & Recp J -Box No. 3 as shown on Drawings. Conductors will be run in existing 3/4" PVC coated rigid conduits to junction boxes. P &IDs reflect the final control of the processes. The Typical Wiring Diagrams describe the final wiring configuration for each piece of equipment modified and/or added as part of this Contract. All work with existing conduits and panels will require close coordination with both the ENGINEER as well as the OWNER No work in existing conduits and panels can begin without approval by ENGINEER and OWNER 2. Applications Software: Provided by ENGINEER for PLCs and Process Monitoring and Control System (PMCS). CONTRACTOR's support shall include the following activities and as further specified in this Section and in PICS Subsystem sections: a. Assistance with onsite checkout of application software. b. As specified in Article SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING. 3. OWNER Training: As specified herein and in PICS Subsystems. 4. Wiring Diagrams: PICS Subcontractor shall provide all wiring diagrams for all equipment and devices shown on the P &IDs and Typical Wiring Diagrams. Typical Wiring Diagrams are provided in the Contract Documents as a basis to fill in termination information. The PICS Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining all termination information for the various equipment controls once the ENGINEER has approved their submittals. The PICS Subcontractor will submit the wiring diagrams for approval by the ENGINEER in three sets: a. Initial Wiring Diagrams: Submitted within 30 calendar days after PICS Presubmittal Conference. Shall consist of Loop Drawings and Interconnect Wiring Diagrams. The Typical Wiring Diagrams in the Contract Documents shall be split so one control loop (determined by loop number) is shown per Drawing. All interior control panel wiring and terminal block labeling shall be shown in detail, including all panel power wiring. No termination information to non -PICS supplied equipment is required in this submittal. Any additions or modifications to existing control panels shall be include in this submittal. Once this submittal is approved, control panel fabrication can begin. November 2010 13400 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems • b. Construction Wiring Diagrams: Submitted within 14 days after all submittals regarding PLCS equipment, automated valves, motor control centers, and adjustable speed drives have been approved by the ENGINEER This set may be required to be submitted in subsets to better align with the construction sequence of the Project. The construction Wiring Diagram set will include all termination information to all equipment, including package control panels, and PICS supplied instruments. Once submitted and approved by the ENGINEER, the PICS Subcontractor, Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and the CONTRACTOR shall use the construction set as the basis for field wiring, testing, and startup. The PICS Subcontractor will maintain an as -built set throughout construction, incorporating all as -built information from Division 16, ELECTRICAL as well as any changes to the Contract as construction progresses. See Supplement at end of this Section for Example Construction Wiring Diagrams. c. As -built Wiring Diagrams: Submitted 60 days after all equipment has passed ORT -1, and ORT -2 tests. The As -built Wiring Diagrams shall incorporate all as -built changes incurred throughout construction. 5. Extensive field testing, coordination of testing, and field startup activities: The project includes multiple startup activities and project milestones requiring phasing and extensive coordination of the PICS with the overall project Refer to Section 01014 - Work Sequence and Schedule Constraints.doc, for specific requirements. The PICS contractor shall stage PICS activities with CONTRACTOR to support the construction sequencing requirements. PICS Subcontractor will be required to perform ORT -1, and ORT -2 testing for each major plant process control startups. D. Work Not Included: 1. Application Software: Provided by the ENGINEER for PLCs and PMCS. E. Minimum PICS Subcontractor's Work Scope: 1. For I &C equipment and ancillaries required under PICS Subsystem sections: a. Required Submittals b. Equipment and ancillaries. c. Instructions, details, and recommendations to, and coordination with, CONTRACTOR for Certificate of Proper Installation. d. Modifications and /or additions to all control panels that house PLCs. e. Prepare a training plan. f. Verify readiness for operation. g. Verify the correctness of final power and signal connections (lugging and connecting) h. Adjusting and calibrating. November 2010 13400 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems i. Starting up. j. Testing and coordination of testing. k. Conduct OWNER training classes. 2. Verify following Work not by the PICS Subcontractor is provided: a. Correct type, size, and number of signal wires with their raceways b. Correct electrical power circuits and raceways. c. Correct size, type, and number of PICS related pipes, valves, fittings, and tubes. d. Correct size, type, materials, and connections of process mechanical piping for in -line primary elements. 3. For equipment not provided under PICS Subsystems, but directly connected to equipment required by PICS Subsystems: a. Obtain from CONTRACTOR, manufacturers' information on installation, interface, function, and adjustment. b. Coordinate with CON TRACTOR to allow required interface and operation with PICS. c. For operation and control, verify the installations, interfacing signal terminations, and adjustments have been completed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. d. Test to demonstrate required interface and operation with PICS. e. Examples of items in this category, but not limited to the following: 1) Valve operators, position switches, and controls. Refer to, and coordinate with, Section 15203, BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS. 2) Motor control centers 3) Adjustable speed drive systems. 4) Equipment control stations. 5) Equipment control interlocks. f. Examples of items not in this category: 1) Internal portions of equipment provided under Division 16, ELECTRICAL, that are not directly connected to equipment required under PIGS Subsystems 2) Internal portions of Process Instrumentation and Control subsystems provided as part of package systems and that are not directly connected to equipment provided under PICS Subsystems. F. Electrical Raceways: As specified in Section 16110, RACEWAYS. November 2010 13400 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Abbreviations: 1. CS: Computer Subsystem 2. FDT: Factory Demonstration Test 3. ISA: Instrument Society of America 4. I /O: Inputs and Outputs 5. O &M: Operation and Maintenance 6. ORT: Operational Readiness Test 7. PAT: Performance Acceptance Test 8. PC: Personal Computer 9. PET: Primary Elements and Transmitters 10. PICS: Process Instrumentation and Control System 11. P &ID: Process and Instrument Diagram 12. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller 13. PMCS: Process Monitoring and Control Software 14. RAT: Reliability Acceptance Test 15. SDT: Software Demonstration Test 16. UFT: Unwitnessed Factory Test 17. UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply B. Enclosure: Control panel, console, cabinet, or instrument housing. C. Instructor Day: 8 hours of actual instruction time. D. Signal Types: 1. Analog Signals, Current Type: a. 4 to 20 mA dc signals conforming to ISA S50.1. b. Unless otherwise indicated for specific PICS Subsystem components, use the following ISA 50.1 options: 1) Transmitter Type: Number 2, two -wire 2) Transmitter Load Resistance Capacity: Class L 3) Fully isolated transmitters and receivers 2. Analog Signals, Voltage Type: 1 to 5 volts dc within panels where a common high precision dropping resistor is used. 3. Discrete signals, two -state logic signals using dc or 120V ac sources as indicated. 4. Special Signals: Other types of signals used to transmit analog and digital information between field elements, transmitters, receivers, controllers and digital devices. November 2010 13400 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, unless otherwise specified in this Section or in PICS Subsystem sections. B. Variations: In accordance with the General Conditions, except that written notice of variations will be submitted with respective submittals. C. Partial submittals not in accordance with PICS Progress Schedule will not be accepted. D. Excessive Resubmission of Shop Drawings, Training Plans, Operations and Maintenance Manuals, and Test Procedures; As specified in SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Section 01300, SUBMITTALS. E. Presubmittal Conference 1. The ENGINEER shall arrange and conduct a Presubmittal Conference within 14 calendar days after the PICS Kickoff Meeting. The purpose of the Presubmittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR, the Instrumentation Supplier, and the ENGINEER shall attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 4 -hour half day for the Conference. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the Conference: a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PCIS and the manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. b. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER. c. An exact one -to -one sample of each type of submittal herein. d. A flow chart showing the steps to be taken in preparing and coordinating each submittal to the ENGINEER. e. A bar -chart type schedule for all system related activities from the Presubmittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming (by others), factory November 2010 13400 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule. f. An overview of the proposed training plan. The OWNER's staff and ENGINEER will review the overview and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at the pre - submittal conference. The overview shall include the following for each proposed course. 1) Course title and objectives. 2) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 3) Course content - a topical outline. 4) Course duration. 5) Course format - lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc. 4. The ENGINEER will preside at the Presubmittal Conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. CONTRACTOR shall advise ENGINEER within 5 days of receipt of minutes if CONTRACTOR does not agree with content of minutes. F. Action Submittals: 1. General: a. Shop Drawings, full - scaled details, catalog cuts and descriptive literature. All PICS submittals shall be prepared in reproducible electronic files. For example, this includes, but not limited to, panel drawings, testing, equipment data sheets. This does not include equipment vendor standard catalog literature. The final version of these files shall be included in O &M Manuals. b. Wiring diagrams submitted in initial, construction and as -built sets. c. Identify proposed items and options. d. Legends and Abbreviation Lists: As part of first submittals for each PICS Subsystem, submit complete definition of symbols and abbreviations used on this Project. 2. Submittals Required for PICS Subsystems: a. Instrumentation and Panels Subsystem b. List of Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Proposed for Project: Separate Submittals for each PICS Subsystem. November 2010 13400 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems c. Additional Equipment Recommended: List of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables, and test equipment recommended by PICS Subcontractor. Include unit prices and total costs. 3. Operation and Maintenance (O &M) Manuals: a. In accordance with Section 01730, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION, unless otherwise specified in this section b. Content and Format: 1) Complete sets of separately bound O &M manuals for each PICS Subsystem with reproducible electronic files included. 2) Sufficient detail to allow operation, removal, installation, replacements for each PICS component. 3) Final versions of Legend and Abbreviation Lists. c. Manual Submission Requirements: 1) O &M manual outline. 2) Final O &M manuals. G. Information Submittals: 1. Schedule of Values and PICS Progress Schedule: a. Submit at PICS Presubmittal Conference. b. Upon acceptance by ENGINEER, shall form basis and schedule for all Submittal reviews, test witnessing, and partial payments relating to PICS Work. c. Prior to this acceptance, ENGINEER will not review Submittals, witness tests, or consider requests for partial payment related to PICS Work. d. PICS Progress Schedule shall be coordinated with CONTRACTOR and shall be in accordance with Section 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS. 2. Certificates: For all PICS equipment, require PICS Subcontractor to provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation and readiness for operation, using ORT forms. 3. Testing Related Submittals: a. Unwitnessed Factory Test: No Submittals required. b. Factory Demonstration Test and Performance Acceptance Test: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed tests, forms and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed test procedures, forms and checklists 3) Test Documentation. Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. c. Operational Readiness Tests: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures: Outlines of proposed test, forms and checklists. November 2010 13400 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation_and Control Systems 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed forms and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Completed component calibration sheets with O &M manual. d. Performance Acceptance Tests: 1) Preliminary Test Procedures; Outlines of proposed tests, forms and checklists. 2) Final Test Procedures: Proposed tests, forms and checklists. 3) Test Documentation: Copy of signed off test procedures when tests are completed. 4. Training Submittals: Subsequent to the receipt of the OWNER'S and ENGINEER's inputs made at the Presubmittal Conference, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a training plan which includes: a. A resubmittal of the training plan overview from the Presubmittal Conference with incorporation of all modifications agreed upon at that meeting. b. Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each class. c. Resumes of the instructors who will actually implement the plan. 5. As -Built Wiring Diagrams Submittals: Final as -built set of wiring diagrams with CONTRACTOR, Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and PICS supplier coordination signature that each supplier has completed all as- built markups to every detailed wiring diagram in the construction set of wiring diagrams. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. PICS Subcontractor's Site Representative: Minimum of 5 years' experience installing systems similar to PICS as required for this Project. 2. Field Service Representative: Minimum of 5 years' experience installing, calibrating, and troubleshooting systems as described in this section. ® B. Coordination Meetings: 1. General: In accordance with Section 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS. 40 a. Attendees May Include: ENGINEER, OWNER, CON TRACTOR, and ® PICS Subcontractor. !l III November 2010 13400 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems Ili If'' b. First Meeting: Within 7 days after Notice to Proceed, there shall be a PIC Kickoff meeting, separate from the Project Kickoff meeting to discuss and coordinate only PIC issues. Thereafter, bi- monthly, prior to first startup activity and weekly during startup activities. Include meetings on progress schedule. 2. Other Coordination Meetings: Refer to PICS Subsystem for additional meeting requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide field and warehouse storage facilities for all PICS equipment B. Prior to shipment, include corrosive- inhibitive vapor capsules in shipping containers, and related equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer. C. Prior to installation, store items in dry indoor locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. D. Cover panels and other elements that are exposed to dusty construction environments. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Environmental Design Requirements: The following defines certain types of environments. PICS Subsystems refer to these definitions by name to specify the environments requirements for individual equipment units. 1. Inside: a. Temperature: 20 to 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous 2. Outside: a. Temperature: Minus 20 to 110 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: 10 to 95 percent noncondensing, rain, snow, freezing rain c. NEC Classification: Nonhazardous • • • November 2010 - 13400 10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems • • 11 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Project Milestones: Refer to Section 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS, for list of overall Project Milestones and construction sequencing requirements. Stage PICS activities (submittals, fabrication, installation, testing, startup, and training) for each facility or • activity to support construction sequencing requirements. B. Schedule of Values: 1. Purpose: Included in the Project Schedule of Values and Progress Schedule to provide a basis for partial payment for work completed. 2. Content: Summary of major Milestones and associated partial payments for work provided under PICS Subsystems. 3. Requests for partial payment shall be considered providing: a. Milestone activity is completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Activity Completion b. Prerequisite activities are completed in accordance with criteria in paragraph Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times, and in conformance with Progress Schedule. C. PICS Progress Schedule: 1. Purpose: Supplement the overall Project Progress Schedule to: a. Coordinate activities between CONTRACTOR and PICS Subcontractor with special emphasis placed on coordination with Section 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS. b. Coordinate interactions with ENGINEER and OWNER for coordination meetings, Submittal reviews, test witnessing, and training. c. Clarify required Work sequences and major Milestone prerequisites. 2. Format: In accordance with Section 01014 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS 3. Content: a. Include All: 1) Design activities 2) Preparation of Submittals 3) Submittal submission 4) ENGINEER reviews of Submittals 5) Purchasing, fabricating, and assembly activities 6) Shipment and delivery 7) Installation 8) Testing November 2010 13400 -11 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 9) Startup 10) Training 11) Coordination meetings 12) Substantial completion 13) Acceptance 4. Activity prerequisites (by symbol). 5. Required lead times. 6. Identify by special symbol Milestones where a request for partial payment is planned. 7. Obtain ENGINEER's approval if Submittals for a PICS Subsystem are proposed to be made in multiple packages, show each package. 8. For an example of a Progress Schedule, refer to Article SUPPLEMENTS. D. Activity Completion: The following is a list of key activities and their completion criteria: 1. Administrative Submittals: Reviewed and accepted. 2. Shop Drawings: Review and approved. 3. Quality Control Submittals: Reviewed and accepted. 4. Manufacturers Certificates of Proper Installation: Reviewed and accepted. 5. Test (Except ORT): Tests have been completed and required test documentation has been accepted. 6. ORT - Part 1: ORT - Part 1 has been completed and ENGINEER has spot - checked associated test forms and checklists in field. 7. Hardware Delivery: Hardware has been delivered to site and inventoried by OWNER or his representative. 8. ORT - Part 2: ORT - Part 2 has been completed and the system is ready for operation. E. Allowance for Interruptions to CONTRACTOR's Work Due to Applications Software Testing: 1. During ORT, CONTRACTOR shall anticipate interruption of testing and delays to work and allow: a. Investigation of software problems. b. ENGINEER to make software configuration changes c. Retesting 2. Refer to Paragraph Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times for specified time allowances. 3. Exclude from this time allowance, time delays caused by applications software testing to accommodate substituted plant equipment or altered equipment interfaces. • November 2010 13400 -12 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements • 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems • F. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start following key Project activities until prerequisite activities and lead times listed below have been completed and satisfied (Refer to PICS Subsystems): -) 1. Submittal Reviews by ENGINEER: ) a. Prerequisite: ENGINEER acceptance of the Schedule of Values and PICS Progress Schedule b. Schedule: PICS hardware and training Submittals within 90 days after award of contract. c. Initial wiring diagrams 2. Hardware Purchasing, Fabrication, and Assembly: Associated Shop Drawing Submittals completed. 3. PLC and PMCS Applications Software Configuring by ENGINEER 4. Shipment to Site: Completion of PICS Shop Drawing Submittals, ® preliminary O &M manuals. 5. PICS Installation: Approval of Construction Wiring Diagrams Submittal. 6. Tests: Associated test plan Submittal completed. 7. Training: Associated training plan Submittal completed 8. ORT - Part 1: Installation complete. (All PICS modifications, installation, etc. complete, and ready for loop checks) 9. ORT - Part 2: ORT - Part 1 complete ® 10. As -Built Wiring Diagrams Submittals: ORT - Part 2 complete. ® G. PICS Substantial Completion: Reference General Conditions, unless otherwise I 11 noted below for PICS. Additional prerequisites for Substantial Completion ® include: p 1. PICS Submittals have been accepted or approved, as specified. 2. PICS has successfully completed ORT - Part 2. 3. OWNER training plan is on schedule 11 4. Spares, expendables, and test equipment have been delivered to OWNER. H. PICS Acceptance: Reference General Conditions, unless otherwise specified ® below for PICS. 1. When ENGINEER issues a written notice of acceptance, the following prerequisites shall have been met: ® a. PICS Certificate of Substantial Completion ® b. Punch -list items completed c. Final revisions to O &M manuals accepted November 2010 13400 -13 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. PIGS functions as shown on Drawings and as required in PICS Subsystems for each subsystem and loop. Furnish equipment items as required in PICS Subsystems. Furnish all materials, equipment, and software whether indicated or not, necessary to effect required subsystem and loop performance. B. First Named. Manufacturer: PICS design is based on first named manufacturers of equipment, materials, and software required in PICS Subsystems. 1. If an item is proposed from other than first named manufacturer, obtain approval from ENGINEER for such changes in accordance with Article SUBMITTALS. 2. If proposed item requires, but not limited to, different installation, wiring, raceway, enclosures, intrinsically safe barriers, and accessories, provide such equipment and work and modifications to contract documents, including wiring diagrams. C. Like Equipment Items: 1. Use products of one manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services 2. Implement all same or similar functions in same or similar manner. For example, but not limited to, control logic, sequence controls and display layouts. 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Test PICS elements, both hardware and software, to demonstrate that PICS satisfied requirements. 2. Onsite Tests Described Under PART 3, EXECUTION: a. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT — Part 1 and ORT — Part 2). b. Test Format: Cause and effect. c. Person conducting test initiates an input (cause). d. Specific test requirement is satisfied if correct result (effect0, occurs November 2010 13400 -14 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 41 3. Procedures, Forms, and Checklists: a. Conduct tests in accordance with and documented on, ENGINEER accepted procedures, forms and checklists. b. Describe each test item to be performed. c. Have space after each test item description for sign -off by appropriate • party after satisfactory completion. 4. Required Test Documentation: Test procedures, forms and checklists signed by ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR except for ORT items signed only by CONTRACTOR 5. Conducting Tests: a. Special testing materials and equipment b. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. c. If not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. d. Define simulation techniques in test procedures. 6. Coordinate PICS testing with OWNER and affected Subcontractors. 7. ENGINEER may actively participate in many of the tests. 8. ENGINEER reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated test procedures. 9. ENGINEER's decision will be final regarding acceptability and completeness of all testing. 10. Excessive Test Witnessing: a. OWNER will recover costs for witnessing retesting of corrected or replaced defective Work, and for return visits to manufacturing facilities to witness factory testing or retesting as set forth in Supplementary Conditions b. Refer to Article SUBMITTALS, paragraph: Excessive Submittal Reviews for rates. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Equipment furnished by PICS Subcontractor and installed by CONTRACTOR, requires PICS Subcontractor to observe and advise on installation to extent required to certify with ORT that equipment has been properly installed and will perform as required. B. For equipment not provided by PICS Subcontractor, but that directly interfaces with the PICS, verify the following conditions: 1. Proper installation. 2. Calibration and adjustment of all positioners and I/P transducers. 3. Correct control action. November 2010 13400 -15 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 4. Switch settings and dead bands. 5. Opening and closing speeds and travel stops. 6. Input and output signals. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following manufacturer's services for the instrumentation listed below: 1. Perform bench calibration 2. Oversee installation 3. Verify installation of installed instrument 4. Certify installation and reconfirm manufacturer's accuracy statement 5. Oversee loop testing, prepare loop validation sheets, and certify loop testing 6. Oversee precommissioning, prepare precommissioning validation sheets, and certify precommissioning 7. Train the OWNER's personnel B. Manufacturer's services shall be furnished for the following equipment: 1. Dissolved Oxygen Controllers and Sensors 2. Flowmeters 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Material and Equipment Installation: • a) Follow manufacturers' installation instructions, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the ENGINEER. b) Retain a copy of manufacturers' instructions at site, available for review at all times. B. Wiring connected to PICS components and assemblies, including power wiring in accordance with requirements in Section 16120, 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE. November 2010 13400 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: All requirements listed in paragraph General under Article SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL, also applies to this Article. B. Onsite Supervision: 1. PICS site representative to supervise and coordinate onsite PICS activities. 2. PICS site representative shall be onsite during total period required to I III complete onsite PICS activities. C. Startup and Testing Team: 1. Thoroughly check installation, termination, and adjustment of PICS Subsystems. 2. Complete onsite tests. 3. Complete onsite training. 4. Provide startup assistance to OWNER. D. Operational Readiness Test (ORT): Prior to startup test period and PAT for each facility, inspect, test, and document that the associated PICS equipment is ready for operation. These are the activities that Section 01650, COMMISSIONING AND FACILITY STARTUP, refers to as "Cleaning and Checking" and "Functional Testing ". Break the ORT for each facility into two parts: 1. ORT -Part 1: Performed by PICS Subcontractor to test and document that the PICS, excluding ENGINEER provided applications software, is ready for operation. For PICS equipment for which the ENGINEER provides applications software, provide sufficient temporary software configuration to allow testing of this equipment. a. Loop /Component Inspection and Tests: 1) Check PICS for proper installation, calibration, and adjustment on a loop -by -loop and component -by- component basis. Work with Division 16, ELECTRICAL, to troubleshoot any loops failing tests. Division 16, ELECTRICAL, responsible for field wiring between PICS control panels and PICS field equipment. 2) Provide space on forms for signoff by PICS subcontractor. 3) Use loop status report to organize and track inspection, adjustment, and calibration of each loop and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Tag number for each component. d) Checkoffs /Signoffs for Each Component: (1) Tag/identification. (2) Installation. (3) Termination wiring. November 2010 13400 -17 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems (4) Termination tubing. (5) Calibration/adjustment. e) Checkoffs /Signoffs for the Loop: (1) Panel interface terminations. (2) I/O interface terminations with PLCs. f) I/O Signals for PLCs are Operational: Received/sent, processed, adjusted. g) Total loop operational. h) Space for comments. i) ORT -1 forms must be signed by PICS Subcontractor, Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and ENGINEER before they can be submitted to the ENGINEER for final approval. 4) Component calibration sheet for each active PET component (except simple hand switches, lights, gauges, and similar items) and each PLCs I/O module and include the following: a) Project name. b) Loop number. c) Component tag number or I/O module number. d) Component code number for PET elements. e) Manufacturer for PET elements. f) Model number /serial number for PET elements. g) Summary of Functional Requirements, for Example: (1) Indicators and recorders, scale and chart ranges. (2) Transmitter /converters, input and output ranges. (3) Computing elements' function. (4) Switching elements, unit range, differential (fixed /adjustable), reset (auto /manual). (5) I/O Modules: Input or output. h) Calibrations, for Example, but not Limited to: (1) Analog Devices: Actual inputs and outputs of 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. (2) Discrete Devices: Actual trip points and reset points. (3) I/O Modules: Actual inputs or outputs of 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling. i) Space for comments. 5) Maintain loop status reports, valve adjustment sheets, and component calibration sheets at site and make them available to ENGINEER at all time. 6) These inspections and test will be spot checked by ENGINEER. Full testing by PICS Subcontractor shall be completed prior to verification of ORT -1 by ENGINEER 7) ENGINEER reviews loop status sheets and component calibration sheets and spot -check their entries periodically, and upon completion of ORT. Correct deficiencies found. November 2010 13400 -18 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems b. ORT Forms: Example ORT forms referenced in Article SUPPLEMENTS. c. If excessive field errors are discovered during ORT -1, ENGINEER may require a complete retesting of PICS subsystem. 2. ORT -Part 2: Combined effort between PICS Subcontractor and ENGINEER to confirm that PICS, including application software, is ready for operation. a. Prerequisite: Completion of ORT -Part 1, all forms signed by ENGINEER and Division 16, ELECTRICAL. b. Joint test with ENGINEER. Repeat of ENGINEER's SDT application software tests, except using real field sensors and equipment. Plant interlocks and communications with PLC's and PMCS equipment tested on a loop -by -loop basis. c. Test procedures provided by ENGINEER based on ORT -1 and on applications software tests. E. Specialty Equipment: For certain components or systems provided under this Section but not manufactured by PICS Subcontractor, provide services of qualified manufacturer's representative during installation, startup, demonstration testing, and OWNER training. Refer to Article MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES in PICS Subsystems for specific requirements. F. As -built Wiring Diagrams: Coordinate with Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and CONTRACTOR during field installation, testing and startup to as -built the construction set of PICS wiring diagrams. 3.05 TRAINING A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall train the OWNER'S personnel on the maintenance, calibration, and repair of the Flow Control Valves, Dissolved Oxygen Controllers and Sensors, and Thermal Dispersion Air Flow Meters provided under this Contract. . B. Instructions: The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the equipment manufacturers and shall be specific to each piece of equipment. C. Duration: Each training class shall be a minimum of 4 hours in duration and shall cover, as a minimum, operational theory, maintenance, trouble shooting/repair, and calibration of the instrument. D. Schedule: Training shall be performed during the precommissioning phase of the project. The training sessions shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of when the courses are to be initiated. The ENGINEER will review the course outline for suitability and provide comments that shall be incorporated. November 2010 13400 -19 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems E. Agenda: The training shall include operation and maintenance procedures, trouble shooting with necessary test equipment, and changing set points, and calibration for that specific piece of equipment. F. Documentation: Within 10 days after the completion of each session the CON I'RACTOR shall submit the following: 1. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with notes, diagrams, and comments. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect all enclosures and other equipment containing electrical, instrumentation, and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsules. B. Periodically replace capsules in accordance with capsule manufacturer's recommendations. Replace all capsules just prior to Final Payment and Acceptance. 3.07 SUPPLEMENTS A. The supplements listed below, following "END OF SECTION" are part of this specification. 1. Example Operation Readiness Test (ORT) Forms: a. ORT -1 Form. b. Instrumentation Calibration Sheet: Provides detailed information on each instrument (except simple hand switches, lights, and similar items). c. Valve Adjustment Sheets: Each sheet shows detailed information for installation, adjustment, and calibration of a given valve. 2. CWS PLC -4 INPUT /OUTPUT LIST. END OF SECTION November 2010 13400 -20 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems • °CWS PLC -4 INPUT /OUTPUT LIST _ • Loop PLC Signal Control PLC 110 PLC PLC Zero State One State Engr MID Wiring No. Tagname Description Function Cabinet Type No. RacklBasel Slot Point Address Terminals Low Range High Range Unit Drawing Diagram Profibus Slave 06 -40101 06AT40101 -1 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 5 DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 13 1 3 WX2051 01, C3 0 5 PPM 51703 - 0924 -P201 06AT40101 06 -40101 06AT40101 -2 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 6 DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 13 3 6 WX2070 B5, B7 0 5 PPM 51703-0924 -P201 06AT40101 06 -40102 06AT40102 -1 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 7A DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 13 1 4 WX2052 131, D3 0 5 PPM E>dsting Existing 06 -40102 06AT40102 -2 AERATION Basin 4 SPARE CHANNEL DO DO 06LCP00403 N/A N/A 13 3 8 WX2072 D5, D7 N/A N/A NIA Existing Existing 06 -40103 06AT40103 -1 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 7C DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 13 1 5 WX2053 A5, A7 0 5 PPM E>dsting Existing 06 -40103 06AT40103 -2 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 7E DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 13 3 7 WX2071 C5, C7 0 5 PPM E dsting Existing 06 -40104 06AT40104 -1 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 78 DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 14 4 8 WX2336 . D6, D7 0 5 PPM 51703- 0924-P201 06AT40104 06 -40104 06AT40104 -2 AERATION Basin 4 CELL 7D DO DO 06LCP00403 Al PLC -4 14 12 8 WX2400 06, 07 0 5 PPM 51703- 0924 -P201 06AT40104 Al: 5 AO: 0 • DI 0 DO 0 I/O TOTAL FOR BASE 13 (O6LCP00403): TOTAL: 5 Al: 5 AO: 0 DI 0 DO 0 I/O TOTAL FOR BASE 14 (06LCP00403): TOTAL: 5 AI: 7 AO: 0 DI 0 DO 0 I/O TOTAL FOR PLC -4: TOTAL: 7 October 2010 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Process Instrumentation and Control Systems 13400 90% Submittal (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 19 SECTION 13442 PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Dissolved Oxygen Controllers and Sensors (06AIT40104 Controller with 06AE40104 -1 and 06AE40104 -2) Sensors. Provide one (1) new Controller with two (2) new Sensors as specified herein; and remove and reinstall (1) existing Sensors. The existing Dissolved Oxygen Sensor must be removed and stored carefully following manufacturers directions to prevent causing drying and permanent damage to the Sensors. Coordinate the removal of the Dissolved Oxygen Sensor with the Owner. B. Refer the I/O list included in section 13400. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards 1. American Gas Association (AGA) a. Gas Measurement Committee Report #3 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) a. Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition 4. American Society for testing and Materials (ASTM) a. Al26, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings b. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy — Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves and Parts for High Temperature Service c. A240, Standard Specification for Heat - Resisting Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels d. B61, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The instruments specified in this Section are the primary element components for the control loops shown on the P &ID Drawings and specified. These instruments are integrated with other control system components to produce the functional control defined in the Contract Documents. November 2010 13442 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Primary Elements and Transmitters 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: See Section 01300. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: See Section 01730. C. Record Drawings: See Section 13400. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers listed in the articles describing the elements are acceptable. 2.02 TUBING AND TUBING FITTINGS A. Instrument tubing between the process connection and instruments shall be 3/8- inch OD x 0.065 -inch wall thickness, seamless annealed ASTM A269, Type 316 stainless steel. B. Tubing fittings shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Fittings shall be of the swage ferrule design and shall have components (nut, body and ferrule system) interchangeable with those of at least one other manufacturer. Flare and ball sleeve compression type are not acceptable. Fittings shall be Crawford Swagelok. 2.03 ANALYTICAL ELEMENTS A. Dissolved Oxygen Controller /Sensor 1. Acceptable Manufacturer a. Hach 2. Sensor and Probe a. Luminescent technology, model 5790000 b. Probe materials: foamed Noryl and 316 stainless steel c. Sensor materials: Polybutyl Methacrolate d. Automatic temperature compensation e. Integral cable with quick disconnect plug f. Measuring range: unlimited between 0 00 g g e an 20.00 mg /1 g. Resolution: 0.01 mg/1 h. Accuracy: +/- 0.1 mg /1 <1 mg /1 < +/ -0.2 mg /I i. Sensitivity: +/ -0.05% of span J. Response time: 90 % <60seconds; 95 % <90 seconds. November 2010 13442 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Primary Elements and Transmitters 3. Controller a. Model LXV401.52.00002 SC100 b. Display: graphic dot matrix LCD, 128 x 64 pixels with LED backlighting c. Outputs: Two analog 4 -20 mA signals 4. Accessories a. Manufacturer supplied hardware and pole to handrail -mount sensor b. Provide complete sensor to analyzer interconnect cable c. Manufacturer supplied air blast cleaner clip kit for use with owner supplied air. d. Manufacturer supplied air tubing for air blast cleaner e. Air set for air blast cleaning (reference the "Air Blast Cleaner Supply Air Detail" shown on drawing E317) 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and appurtenances required for mounting primary elements and transmitters. 1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316 stainless steel. b. Mounting brackets: 1) Standard: 316 SST c. Mounting Plates, Angles 1) Standard: 316 SST B. Each sensor shall be identified with an instrument marker as specified in section 16040 Identification. Each controller and transmitter shall be identified with a nameplate as specified in section 16040 Identification. C. Cable lengths between sensors and transmitters shall be continuous and as required to accommodate locations as shown on Drawings. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Reference attached Field Instrument List. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide equipment manufacturer's field services: November 2010 13442 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Primary Elements and Transmitters 1. The CONTRACTOR shall require the I &C subcontractor to observe and advise on the installation of the primary elements to insure that the devices will perform as required. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall require the I &C subcontractor to be on -site during the start -up and demonstration periods. 3.03 TESTING A. Testing shall be as specified in Section 13400. END OF SECTION November 2010 13442 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Primary Elements and Transmitters SECTION 15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Process piping systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Referenced Standards 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. B16.5 — Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings b. B16.9 — Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt- Welding Fittings c. B16.22 — Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder — Joint Pressure Fittings d. B16.26 — Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes e. B36.19 — Stainless Steel Pipe 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. A269 — Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service b. A312 — Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes c. A774 — Standard Specification for As- Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures d. A778 — Standard Specification for Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products e. B88 — Seamless Copper Water Tube (ANSI H23.1) B. Coordinate flange dimensions and drillings between piping, valves and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. See Section 01300. 2. Fabrication and/or Layout Drawings a. Piping drawings (minimum scale 1/8 inch equals 1 foot) with information including: i. Dimensions of piping from column lines or wall surfaces. November 2010 15060 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements ® 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings ii. Centerline dimensions of piping. iii. Centerline elevation and size of intersecting ductwork, conduit/conduit racks, or other potential interferences requiring coordination. iv. Location and type of pipe supports and anchors. v. Locations of valves and valve actuator type. vi. Details of fittings, tapping locations, equipment connections, flexible expansion joints, connections to equipment and related appurtenances. vii. Acknowledgement of valve, equipment and instrument tag numbers. viii. Provisions for expansion and contraction. ix. Line slopes and air release vents. x. Rough -in data for plumbing fixtures. b. Schedule of interconnections to existing piping and method of connection. 3. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storage and installation. c. Separate schedule sheet for each piping system scheduled in this Section showing compliance of all system components. Attach technical product data on gaskets, pipe, fittings and other components. 4. Test Reports a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems. b. Reports defining results of dielectric testing and corrective action taken. c. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests. • 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. See Section 01605. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Insulating Unions a. "Dielectric" by Epco b. Or- equal. November 2010 15060 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2. Dielectric Flange Kit a. PSI b. Maloney c. Central Plastics d. Or- equal. 3. Pipe Saddles a. Dresser Style 91 (steel and ductile iron systems) b. Or- equal. 4. Grooved Couplings a. Victaulic QuickVic b. Or- equal. 2.02 PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to the requirements of specific piping specification sections. 2.03 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES A. Insulating Components 1. Dielectric Flange Kits a. Flat faced. b. 1/8 inch thick dielectric gasket, phenolic, non - asbestos. c. Suitable for 125 psi. d. 1/32 inch wall thickness bolt sleeves. e. 1/8 inch thick phenolic insulating washers. f. Provide dielectric flange kits suitable for continuous operations at flange rated temperature and pressure. 2. Dielectric Unions a. Screwed end connections. b. Rated at 125 psi. 0 c. Provide dielectric gaskets suitable for continuous operations at Qfl union rated temperature and pressure. B. Reducers 0 1. Furnish appropriate size reducers and reducing fittings to mate pipe to equipment connections. Connection size requirements may change from those shown on Drawings depending on equipment furnished. C. Protective Coating and Lining 1. Include pipe, fittings, and appurtenances where coatings, linings, paint, tests and other items are specified. 2. Field paint pipe in accordance with Section 09900. 41 November 2010 15060 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 41 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 41 D. Grooved Couplings 1. Couplings shall be designed specifically for rigid, hanging pipe applications. 2. Materials: a. Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A -536, grade 65 -45- 12. Ductile iron conforming to b. Housing Coating: Enamel. 3. Gasket: a. Grade "T' nitrile 4. Bolts/Nuts: Stainless Steel PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings. B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 inches may not be shown on Drawings. However, install according to Drawing intent and with clearance and allowance for: 1. Expansion and contraction. 2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment. 3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles. 4. System drainage and air removal. C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floor and ceilings using penetrations and seals as shown on the Drawings. D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls. E. Pipe Support 1. Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings. 2. Support systems for piping smaller than 12 inches diameter are not shown on the Drawings. Contractor is responsible for supply and design of these support systems. 3. Where pipes run parallel and at same elevation or grade, they may be grouped and supported from common trapeze -type hanger, provided hanger rods are increased in size as specified for total supported weight. The pipe in this group requiring the least maximum distance between supports shall set the distance between trapeze hangers. 4. Size pipe supports with consideration to specific gravity of liquid being piped and with consideration of buoyancy for submerged pipes. November 2010 15060 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 0 0 0 O F. Locate and size sleeves and castings required for piping system. Arrange for chases, recesses, inserts or anchors at proper elevation and location. 41 G. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be allowed O unless specifically approved. In H. Unions 1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed 4) without dismantling adjacent piping. 2. Mechanical type couplings may serve as unions. 41 3. Additional flange unions are not required at flanged connections. 0 41 I. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement. ®, J. Provide full -face gaskets on all systems. ®/ K. Anchorage and Restraint 4) 41 1. Block, anchor or harness exposed piping subjected to forces in which joints are installed to prevent separation of joints and transmission of stress into 0 equipment or structural components not designed to resist those stresses. 41 L. Equipment Pipe Connections O 1. Equipment — General 41 a. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on 41 the opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform 41 gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses QI to be transmitted to equipment flanges. b. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate, which will result in uniform gasket compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening torque in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire face area prior to installation of any bolt between the piping flange and equipment - connecting flange. d. Permit piping connected to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened. e. Align, level and wedge equipment into place during fitting and alignment of connecting piping. f. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection. November 2010 15060 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings M. Provide insulating components where dissimilar metals are jointed together. N. Instrument Connections 1. See Drawing details. 2.04 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable and proper fittings to suit conditions encountered. B. Undertake connections in fashion, which will disturb system as little as possible. C. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past installation methods not currently part of trade practice, utilize necessary special piping components. D. Once tie -in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie - in is made and tested. 2.05 INSTALLATION- BURIED PIPE A. Joints 1. Dissimilar Buried Pipes: Provide dielectric coupling. 2. Concrete Encased or Embedded Pipe: Do not encase joints in concrete unless specifically shown. B. Placement 1. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining are completed. 2. Pipe Bedding and Pipe Zone: As specified in Section 02225. 3. Exercise care when lowering pipe into trench to prevent twisting or damage to pipe. 4. Measure for grade at pipe invert, not at top of pipe. 5. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual inspection and testing of entire flange, valve, or connection. 6. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement. 7. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day's work. 8. Lay pipe upgrade with bell ends pointing in direction of laying. 9. Install closure sections and adapters for gravity piping at locations where pipe laying changes direction. November 2010 15060 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 10. Deflect pipe at joints for pipelines laid on a curve using unsymmetrical closure of spigot into bell. If joint deflection of standard pipe lengths will not accommodate horizontal or vertical curves in alignment, provide: a. Shorter pipe lengths. b. Special mitered joints. c. Standard or special fabricated bends. 11. After joint has been made, check pipe alignment and grade. 12. Place sufficient pipe zone material to secure pipe from movement before next joint is installed. 13. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling. C. PVC, CPVC, or HDPE Pipe Placement 1. Lay pipe snaking from one side of trench to other. 2. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and during operation. 3. Do not lay pipe when temperature is below 40 degrees F, or above 90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. 4. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during the laying operation. D. Tolerances 1. Deflection From Horizontal Line, Except PVC, CPVC, or HDPE: Maximum 2 inches. 2. Deflection From Vertical Grade: Maximum 1 -inch. 3. Joint Deflection: Maximum of 75 percent of manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Horizontal position of pipe centerline on alignment around curves maximum variation of 1.75 feet from position shown. 5. Pipe Cover: Minimum 3 feet, unless otherwise shown. 2.06 THRUST RESTRAINT A. Location: • 1. Buried Piping: At all joints in pressure piping. 2. Exposed Piping: At all joints in pressure piping. 3. Anchoring of retainer glands or thrust ties with setscrews is unacceptable. B. Mechanical Joint Valve Restraint in Proprietary Restrained Joint Piping: Install pipe joint manufacturer's adapter gland follower and pipe end retainer. November 2010 15060 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pipe Testing — General 1. Test piping systems as follows: a. Test exposed, non - insulated piping systems upon completion of system. b. Test exposed, insulated piping systems upon completion of system but prior to application of insulation. 2. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions. 3. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages to determine leakage rates. a. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. b. Notify the Engineer 24 hours prior to each test. 4. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems. 5. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of test and inspections in writing to Engineer prior to final acceptance. 6. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary retesting and re- examination. B. Pressure Testing 1. Allowable Leakage Rates: As specified in the piping specification sections. 2. Air Testing Methodology a. General i. Assure air is ambient temperature. b. Low Pressure Air (LPA) Testing i. Testing Medium: Air ii. Place plugs in line and inflate to 20 psig. iii. Check pneumatic plugs for proper sealing. iv. Introduce low- pressure air into sealed line segment until air pressure reaches test pressure. (1) Use test gage conforming to ANSI B40.1 with 0 to 25 psi scale and accuracy of 1 percent of full range. v. Allow 2 minutes for air pressure to stabilize. vi. Discontinue air supply to line segment. vii. Record pressure at beginning and end of test. c. Non - Potable Water (NPW) and High Pressure Non - Potable Water (HPNPW) November 2010 15060 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings i. Testing Medium: NPW ii. Testing Pressure: 100 psi. iii. Buried Pressure Piping: Apply pressure and test piping for leakage after fine grading material and bedding material have been placed and compacted. Piping may be tested before or after trench backfilling, at Contractor's option. iv. Encased Piping: Test before encasing pipe in concrete. 2.08 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND PURGING A. Cleaning 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation. 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properly dress and make joint. 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system. 5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner. November 2010 15060 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pipe and Pipe Fittings 2.09 PIPING SCHEDULE Service Pipe Material and Specification (Size) Location Buried Exposed All Stainless Steel, Type LPA (Excluding diffuser - 304 distribution pipe as specified in 11088) 15066 NPW / HPNPW Copper, Type K Copper, Type K (2.5 inches and Around Clarifiers smaller) 15067 15067 Ductile Iron, Ductile Iron, NPW Schedule 40 Schedule 40 In Tunnels and Around (Larger than 2.5 Clarifiers Mortar Lined / Coal Tar Mortar Lined / Coal inches) Varnish Coated Tar Varnish Coated 15062 15062 NPW /HPNPW PVC PVC Aeration Basins (All Sizes) 15064 15064 END OF SECTION November 2010 15060 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Pie and Pipe Fittings P P g SECTION 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron piping, joints, fittings, gaskets, and pipe lining and coating. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to various standard documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. B. Unless otherwise specified, references to standard documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by the organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced. C. Related Specifications Sections: 1. The following Specifications Sections are referenced herein. a. Section 01300, Submittals. b. Section 15050, Piping Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with the specified standards. B. Shop Drawings 1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves, fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, connections to structures and thrust restraint system layouts. C. Product Data 1. Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets, couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, pipe linings, and coatings. November 2010 15062 -1 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Ductile Iron Pipe 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Block piping material for shipment, prevent damage to castings and linings. B. Carefully handle piping material during loading, unloading, and installation. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks. Lower piping material by mechanical means. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade. C. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of original lining in accordance with AWWA C 104. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective piping with undamaged piping. D. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long term exposure to sunlight. E. Store fittings and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Piping: 1. Type, Typical: a. AWWA C 150 and AWWA C 151 with minimum pressure class 350. B. Joints: 1. Flanged Joints: • a. Bolt Holes on Flanges: 1) 2 -holed and aligned at both ends of pipe. i. Cap Screw or Stud Bolt Holes: Tapped. ii. Bolts and Nuts: 2) As specified in ANSI /ASME B 16.1 except when connecting flanges underground, in concrete pipe valve boxes, or underwater, use Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel. Cut and finish bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond nut when joints are assembled. 3) Gaskets: Neoprene. 2. Restrained Flange Adapters a. ASTM A536 Ductile iron b. Restraint for the flange adapter shall consist of a plurality of individual actuated gripping wedges to maximize restraint capability. Torque limiting actuating screws shall be used to insure proper initial set of gripping wedges. November 2010 15062 -2 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Ductile Iron Pipe c. The flange adapter shall be capable of deflection during assembly, or permit lengths of pipe to be field cut, to allow a minimum of 0.6" gap between the end of the pipe and the mating flange without affecting the integrity of the seal. d. Manufacturers: EBAA Iron Inc. Series 2100 Megaflange or equal. 3. Grooved Couplings a. Couplings shall be designed specifically for rigid, hanging pipe applications. b. Materials: 1) Housing: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A -536, grade 65- 45 -12. Ductile iron conforming to 2) Housing Coating: Enamel. 3) Gasket: i. Grade "T" nitrile 4) Bolts/Nuts: Stainless Steel 2.02 FITTINGS A. Fittings: 1. Ductile iron conforming with AWWA C 110 /ANSI A 21.10. B. Joint Type: 1. Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems. C. Plain end -to- flanged joint connectors using set screws are not acceptable. 2.03 PIPE LININGS AND COATINGS A. Asphaltic Base Coating: 1. Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes which will not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151 /ANSI A21.51. B. Cement- mortar Lining: 1. AWWA C 104 /ANSI A 21.4, apply on clean bare metal surfaces; extended to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs. C. Provide protective coatings per Section 15050, Piping Systems . November 2010 15062 -3 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Ductile Iron Pipe PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C 600, modified as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems. 2. Lay mechanical joint or bell and spigot pipe with 1/8 inch space between the spigot and shoulder of the pockets. B. Polyethylene Encasement: 1. Wrap ductile iron pipe to be buried with polyethylene encasement in accordance with ASTM A 674 and AWWA C 105. 2. Repair tears and make joints with two layers of plastic tape. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test ductile iron piping as specified in Section 15950. END OF SECTION November 2010 15062 -4 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Ductile Iron Pipe SECTION 15064 POLY -VINYL CHLORIDE PIPE (PVC) PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies polyvinylchloride pipe and fittings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by the organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced. Reference Title AASHTO M278 Class PS46 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D1785 Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2241 Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series) ASTM D2321 Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe ASTM D2467 Socket -Type Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80 ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems ASTM D2665 Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034 Type PSM Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM F402 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe November 2010 15064 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 521- 03 -09 -24 PVC Pipe 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. All PVC pipelines are required to have a straight alignment. For gravity flow sanitary sewer lines, pipes shall have uniform grade between manholes or pipe sections as indicated in the drawings. B. Sections of pipelines and manholes that fail any test shall be repaired or replaced, as acceptable to Owner, and retested until the test is passed. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300. B. Manufacturer's data certificates of compliance with the specified standards. C. Product Data: Provide information on materials, pipe dimensions, fittings, gaskets and solvent cement. D. Contractor's piping layout drawings as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components, fittings and couplings for plastic piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. PVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454 -B. Pipe and fittings shall either be in accordance with ASTM D1785, Schedule 80. Pressure rating for pipe shall be in excess of test pressure specified in Section 15060, Piping Systems. B. Schedule 80 PVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467. PVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2564. 2.02 FITTINGS A. The strength class of the fittings shall be not less than the strength class of any adjoining pipe. November 2010 15064 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 521- 03 -09 -24 PVC Pipe PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling 1. Use wide fabric choker slings. 2. Do not drop pipe or fittings even on cushions. 3. Do not use hooks. 4. Polyvinyl chloride pipe has reduced flexibility and impact resistance as temperatures approach and drop below freezing. Extra care should be used in handling and installing PVC pipe during cold weather. B. Storage 1. Store and use lubricants in a manner that will avoid contamination. 2. Store loose rubber gaskets in a cool, dark location away from grease, oil, and ozone producing electric motors. 3. Store pipe on a surface that provides even support for the pipe barrel. Do not store pipe supported by the bell. 3.02 PIPE CUTTING A. Pipe shall be cut smooth, straight, and at right angles to the pipe axis with saws or pipe cutters designed specifically for the material. Burrs and dust shall be removed from the jointing surfaces. Cut ends shall be beveled in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. PVC pipe joined by means of socket fittings and solvent welding shall be in conformance with ASTM F402. Solvent- cemented joints shall be made in compliance with the manufacturer's /supplier's instructions and recommended procedures. Unless otherwise specified, PVC pipe 4" in diameter and greater shall be joined by means of gasketed push -on joints. Unless otherwise specified, PVC piping exposed to sunlight shall be painted with coating system as specified in Section 09900, Painting. B. Connections to different types of pipe shall be by means of an elastomeric rubber coupling with stainless steel bands and tightening bolts, appropriate to the sizes of the pipes to be joined. Where such couplings are used, bolts shall be uniformly torqued in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Foreign material shall be removed from the pipe interior prior to assembly. C. Join pipe and fittings to the tolerances recommended by the manufacturer. Do not disturb previously completed joints during the joining operation. November 2010 15064 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 521- 03 -09 -24 PVC Pipe 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Testing shall be in accordance with Section 15060, Pipe and Pipe Fittings. PVC pipe, which has any of the following defects, shall not be accepted: 1. Pipe which is sufficiently out -of -round to prohibit proper joining or that is visibly out -of- round. 2. Improperly formed ends. 3. Fractured, cracked, chipped, dented, abrasions, or otherwise damaged pipe. 4. Pipe that has been damaged during shipment or handling. Acceptance of the pipe at point of delivery will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for any defects in material of the completed pipeline. END OF SECTION 1, 0 0 I I ,. November 2010 15064 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 521- 03 -09 -24 PVC Pipe Ii 0 SECTION 15066 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND TUBING PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stainless steel piping. 1.02 PIPING LAYOUT A. Design Drawings indicate the routing of the existing steel and stainless steel aeration pipe at the Aeration Basins. Modify existing pipe as indicated on the Drawings. B. Prepare detailed pipe fabrication drawings based on field reconnaissance and detailed measurements taken by the Contractor and pipe fabricator. C. Several areas along the alignment of the existing pipeline are highly congested with pipes, valves, electrical conduits, and similar items. Contractor may propose alternate pipe installation locations that avoid these highly congested areas. 1.03 PREPARATION OF LAYOUT DRAWINGS A. No attempt has been made on the design Drawings to provide dimensions, locations and orientation of fittings or invert elevations of the pipeline. 1. Take detailed field measurements to determine layout of new pipeline and to provide information for development of layout drawings. a. Utilize layout drawings to shop- fabricate pipe sections. 2. Provide shop fabricated piping sections in pieces that are as long as possible, while still allowing for pickling and passivation, shipment and installation, so that field joints are minimized. a. Piping design indicated on the Drawings illustrates the general piping layout and configuration. No attempt has been made to indicate the location of field joints and couplings that may be needed to connect shop - fabricated piping sections in the field. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Layout Drawings 1. Illustrate configuration of pipe, fittings, supports and piping appurtenances. Identify each piping section that will make up the system including dimensions, elevations, locations of joints for field assembly and installation details. November 2010 15066 -1 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 0 0 0 2. Identify pipe wall thickness, details of joint design and maximum joint deflection, restrained joint details and other piping details. 0 3. Details of fittings and pipe specials including elbows, tees, wyes, outlets, connections, nozzles and other special components of the piping system. 0 4. Welding details including location, type and size. 0 5. Provide layout drawings in latest version of AutoCAD. Submit AutoCAD 0 files after layout drawings have been reviewed and accepted by Engineer. 0 C. Product Data 1. Information on joint types and components used in the system including stub ends, backing flanges, flanged joints, grooved joint couplings and screwed joints. 0 2. Material specifications for pipe, gaskets, fittings, and couplings. 0 D. Manufacturing certifications. 0 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welder Qualifications: Utilize skilled welding operators, qualified under the , 0 provisions of AWS D1.1, to fabricate steel pipe. 0 1.05 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Straight Pipe Sections: Support pipe sections on a minimum of two padded 0 saddles, spaced at intervals not exceeding 20 feet. Provide saddles with a width that provides at least a 90- degree contact angle. B. Fabricated Specials: Support on padded saddles, and crate as necessary to protect fabricated assembly. 0 C. Handling and Storage 0 1. Handle pipe using slings, padded cradles or other devices that will not 0 damage to the pipe. Do not use chains, hooks or other equipment, which 0 might damage the pipe. 0 2. Do not roll pipe during handling operations. 0 3. Do not stack pipe. 0 D. Provide adequate stulling and cross bracing for all pipe sections to prevent damage during handling, storage, hauling, and installation. 0 0 E. Shop Fabrication: Fabricate piping sections in the shop and pickle and passivate at o point of manufacture. 0 SID 0 November 2010 15066 -2 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 0 517- 03 -09 -24 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 0 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS A. Pipe fabricated from commercial stainless steel pipe: Use stainless steel Type 304L material conforming to ASTM A 240. 2.02 PIPE MANUFACTURE A. Unless otherwise specified, ASTM A 240 pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM A 778. B. Wall Thickness: Minimum wall thickness corresponding to Schedule 10S. C. Welding 1. Prepare welds in accordance with AWWA C 200. 2. Welded Joints: Butt- welded with complete penetration and fusion, free from unsound metal, pinholes, cracks and other weld defects. 3. Weld Finish: Reasonably smooth, free of depressions, burrs, weld splatter and other irregularities and suitable for application of protective coatings and linings. D. Pickling and Passivation 1. Following shop fabrication of pipe sections, straight spools, fittings, and other piping components, pickle and passivate fabricated pieces. 2. Immerse fabricated pieces in sulfuric acid solution followed by immersion in a nitric - hydrofluoric bath and subsequent wash at the proper temperature and length of time. 3. Finish Requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. 2.03 FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES A. Fittings and Piping Specials 1. Stainless steel fittings or segmentally welded fittings with ends designed for butt- welded joints. Fabricate fittings from Schedule 10S 304L stainless steel pipe. November 2010 15066 -3 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 0 0 0 2. Dimensional Standards a. Fittings with Weld Ends: In accordance with ANSI B 16.9. 0 b. Fittings with Flanged Ends: In accordance with ANSI B 16.5, Class 150. 3. Wall Thickness of Fittings: In accordance with ANSI B 36.19 for the schedule of pipe specified. 0 0 B. Stainless Steel Fittings and Appurtenances: Conform to the requirements of ASTM A 240 stainless steel grade to match the pipe. 0 C. Standard Steel Fittings: Conforming to ASTM A 774. 0 D. Pressure Ratings and Loadings: Equal to the pipe rating. 0 E. Threaded Outlet Couplings: Forged stainless steel, 3,000 psi service rating. 0 2.04 PIPE JOINTS A. Where the type of joint is specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, design and shop- fabricate piping sections utilizing the type of joint illustrated or 0 scheduled. 0 B. Where the type of joint is not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified 0 in the Piping Schedule, design and shop- fabricate piping sections utilizing any of 0 the following joint types: 1. Piping stub ends with backing flanges. Cast Type 304L stainless steel stub 0 ends with machined gasket surfaces and cast or forged Type 304 stainless 0 steel backing flanges with drilled bolt holes conforming to ASNI B16.5, 0 Class 150. 2. Double butt - welded joints. 0 3. Flanged joints conforming to the requirements of ANSI B16.5, Class 150. 0 2.05 BOLTS, NUTS AND GASKETS 0 0 A. Bolts and Nuts: Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A194 (bolts) and ASTM A194 (nuts). 0 B. Gaskets: EPDM or nitrile. 0 2.06 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING 0 0 A. Seamless tubing made from Type 304 stainless steel and conforming to ASTM A 269, wall thickness not les than 0.035 inch. 0 B. Fittings: Swage ferrule design, with components made of Type 316 stainless steel. 0 0 November 2010 15066 -4 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 0 1. Double acting ferrule design providing both a primary seal and a secondary bearing force. Flare, bite or compression type fittings are not acceptable. 2. Manufacturers: Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelock; Hoke, Garlock; Parker, CPI, or equal. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD ASSEMBLY OF SHOP - FABRICATED PIPING SECTIONS A. Assemble shop- fabricated piping sections in the field using the joints designed in the piping layout or by using flexible couplings. Field welding is prohibited. B. Join shop - fabricated piping sections together using backing flanges, flexible couplings, flanged coupling adapters or flanges. C. Slope horizontal lines so that they can be drained completely. D. Provide valve drains at low points in piping systems. E. Install eccentric reducers where necessary to facilitate draining of piping system. F. Provide access for inspection and flushing of piping systems to remove sediments. 3.02 TESTING A. After the pipe sections are installed, test the pipe for pressure loss in accordance with Section 15060, Test pressure is 25 pounds per square inch. Conduct test in the presence of the Construction Manager. Allowable drop in system pressure is zero. B. Visually inspect pipe for welding defects such as crevices, pits, cracks, protrusions, and oxidation deposits. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Low Pressure Aeration Pipe, all sizes: Stainless steel pipe, except diffuser piping specifically called out on the Drawings as PVC pipe. END OF SECTION November 2010 15066 -5 Durham AB4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Stainless Steel Pipe and Tubing 06060000000606 000@000000600000•000006000000 ti w a SECTION 15067 COPPER PIPE PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Copper piping, tubing, couplings and fittings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Drawings and descriptions of pipe, fittings, couplings, and other materials. B. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with the specified standards. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver copper pipe and tubing to the job site with factory- applied end - caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Protect stored pipe and tube from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade on pallets or other appropriate means. ® C. Protect fittings, flanges, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 COPPER TUBING 4D A. Type: Seamless copper, conforming to ASTM B88. 0 B. Buried and Exposed Service: Use Type K Copper Pipe 2.02 COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING A. Smaller than 1/2-inch Nominal Diameter 0 1. Use compression type, brass or bronze, capable of holding the full bursting strength of the tubing. 2. Comply with ANSI B16.26. 3. Manufacturers: Swagelok, Gyrolok, or equal. B. '/2 -inch and larger Nominal Diameter 0 November 2010 15067 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Copper Pipe 0 0 0 1. Provide wrought copper or bronze, solder joint pressure fittings. 2. Comply with ANSI B16.22. 0 0 2.03 SOLDER 0 A. Solders containing greater than 0.20 percent lead are prohibited from use in potable 0 water systems. 0 B. Solder: Use alloy Grade Sn95 or Silvabrite 100. 0 0 C. Soldering and Brazing Fluxes 0 1. Soldering and brazing fluxes, if used, shall contain less than 0.20 percent lead 0 (Pb) content. Soldering and brazing fluxes containing greater than 0.20 0 percent lead are prohibited from use in potable water systems. 0 2. Soldering Fluxes: Conforming to ASTM B 813, liquid or paste type. 0 3. Brazing Fluxes: Conforming to ANSI /AWS A5.31, Type FB3 -A or FB3 -C. 0 0 PART 3 — EXECUTION 0 3.01 INSTALLATION 0 A. Solder Joints 1. Before soldering, remove burrs and wire brush or clean with steel wool. 0 2. After cleaning, apply a paste flux evenly and sparingly to the surfaces to 0 be joined. o 3. Apply solder and flame pass toward the center of the fitting until the 0 solder disappears. 4. Remove excess solder while it is still plastic. 5. Do not use acid flux or acid wipe in making solder joints. o B. Dielectric Protection ft 1. Provide dielectric unions at connections between copper pipe and pipe of different metals. 2. Do not permit copper tubing or fittings to come in contact with steel piping, reinforcing steel, or other steel at any location. 3. Perform electrical checks to assure no contact is made between copper tubing and steel elements. 4. Wherever electrical contact is demonstrated by such tests, provide dielectric protection. END OF SECTION November 2010 15067 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Copper Pipe SECTION 15110 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non - lubricated eccentric plug valves. 1.02 UNIT RESPONSIBILITY A. Plug valve manufacturer has unit responsibility for valve and actuator compatibility. B. Responsibility of the manufacturer extends to the proper selection, assembly, factory testing, and furnishing of the specified products. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's standard product data. B. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Flanged Valves: a. DeZurik, Model PEC. b. Clow Valve Company, Model F -5412 (flanged). 2. Grooved End Valves: a. Victaulic, Series 365 2.02 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES A. General 1. Description: Non - lubricated, eccentric plug -type valve. 2. Suitable for drip- tight, bi- directional shutoff at the specified valve design pressure. 3. Comply with ANSI /AWWA C517, Resilient - Seated Cast Iron Eccentric Plug Valves. November 2010 15110 -1 . Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Eccentric Plug Valves B. Valve Design 1. Port Design a. Rectangular shaped or Circular Shaped. b. Port Area: i. Valves less than or equal to 20- inches in nominal size: At least 80 percent of the full pipe cross - sectional area. ii. Valves greater than 20- inches in nominal size: At least 70 percent of the full pipe cross - sectional area. 2. Plug Design: a. Geometry: Eccentrically shaped with a cylindrical seating surface that is offset from the center of the plug shaft. b. Facing: i. Encapsulate entire plug with resilient material. ii. Bond between Resilient Facing and Metal Plug: Capable of withstanding 75 -pound pull in accordance with ASTM D 429, Method B. 3. Valve Seats: Welded -in overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel to form a raised area at least 1/8 -inch thick for contact with the plug facing. Machine seat after welding to provide a smooth surface. 4. Shaft Bearing and Bottom Bearing: a. Provide replaceable bearings in the upper and lower shaft trunnions. b. Design: Sleeve -type, permanently lubricated. 5. Shaft Seal: Chevron type packing seal, held in place with an adjustable gland follower. Valves using 0 -ring type shaft seals are not acceptable. C. Valve Body Pressure Ratings • 1. Valves 12 inches in nominal size and smaller: 175 psi. 2. Valves 14- inches through 36- inches in nominal size: 150 psi. 3. Valves 42- inches through 54- inches in nominal size: 125 psi. D. End Connections 1. Valves 3 inches and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. Valves Larger than 3 inches: a. Exposed Piping Systems: Flanged end connections with flange dimensions, facing and drilling conforming to ANSI B16.1, Class 125. b. Buried Piping Systems: Mechanical joint end connections conforming to ANSI A21.11 /AWWA C606. November 2010 15110 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Eccentric Plug Valves 2.03 MATERIALS A. Materials of Construction 1. Body: Cast iron, ASTM Al26, Class B. 2. Plug: Cast iron, ASTM Al26, Class B, or cast iron ASTM A436 (Ni- resist), or ductile iron, ASTM A536. 3. Plug Facing: Neoprene or Buna -N. 4. Body Seats: a. Valves less than 3 inches in nominal size: Cast iron, ASTM Al26, Class B. b. Valves 3 inches in nominal size and larger: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304 or nickel. 5. Stem Packing: Buna -N or PTFE. 6. Plug Bearings: Type 316 stainless steel. 7. Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers: Zinc plated in exposed installations, Type 316 stainless steel in buried installations. B. • Shop Applied Interior and Exterior Coatings 1. Interior Surfaces: Apply two coats Ameron Amerlock 400, Kop Coat Carboline 890LT, or equal. Apply each coat to 4 to 5 mils thick. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Apply polyurethane coating system consisting of one coat primer, one intermediate coat of polyamide epoxy, and one final coat of polyurethane. a. Primer and Intermediate Coats: Ameron Amerlock 400, Kop Coat Carboline 890LT, or equal. Apply each coat to 4 to 5 mils thick. b. Finish Coat: Ameron Amercoat 450HS, Kop Coat Carboline 134HS, Tnemec Series 74 Semi -Gloss Endura- Shield, or equal. Apply 1.5 to 2 mills thick. 2.04 VALVE ACTUATORS A. Buried Service Valves: Provide valve with standard 2 -inch AWWA wrench nut and valve box with lid to accommodate operating stem extension. B. Exposed Service Valves 1. Provide with totally enclosed worm gear actuator with handwheel operator. 2. Where valves are placed 6 feet above the operating floor a chain wheel operator shall be provided with an adequate amount of chain to reach the operating level. November 2010 15110 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Eccentric Plug Valves C. Provide adjustable stop on manual actuators. • D. Size valve actuator components for the valve design pressure in accordance with AWWA C504. Size manual operators such that the torque that must be applied to the actuator to open the valve does not exceed 80 ft -lbs. E. Direction of Rotation: Counterclockwise for opening. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Clean interior of valve and valve end joints before installation. B. Use slings or chains placed around the valve body to lift valve or to lower valve into position. Do not place slings or chains through the port opening or use the mounted actuator for lifting. C. Valve Seat Positions 1. Clean Water Installations: Install valve with the seat on the downstream side of the plug so that in the closed position the higher upstream pressure in the pipeline applies a seating head on the valve plug against the seat. Install valve with the plug stem in the horizontal position with the plug rotating upwards upon opening. 2. Wastewater Installations and Installations with Entrained Suspended Solids: a. Vertical Pipe Runs: install valve with the seat on the top of the valve to prevent solids from packing into body cavity when shut. b. Horizontal Pipe Runs: Install valve with the seat on the upstream side of the valve to prevent solids from packing in body cavity when shut. Install valve with the plug stem in the horizontal position with the plug rotating upwards upon opening. END OF SECTION November 2010 15110 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Eccentric Plug Valves SECTION 15191 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTY VALVES PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specialty valves not specified in other specification Sections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's standard product data for each type of valve. B. Applicable operating and maintenance information specified in Section 01730. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 HOSE VALVES A. Type: Brass angle valve or globe valve, as shown on the drawings, with composition disc and threaded adapter for hose connection. B. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Crane Series 1700. 2. Lunkenheimer Model 214. 3. Powell Model 151. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Clean interior of valve and valve end joints before installation. B. Install valve in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION November 2010 15191 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Miscellaneous Specialty Valves (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL I9 • SECTION 16000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This Section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items are specified in other sections but are subject to the general requirements of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. General: The electrical drawings and schedules included in this package are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the final location of all raceways, equipment, instruments, panels and control stations with the ENGINEER prior to performing any installation work. B. Definitions 1. Elementary or Schematic Diagram: An elementary or schematic diagram shows all circuits and device elements of an equipment item or assembly or any defined functional portion thereof. Such a diagram emphasizes the device elements of a circuit and their functions as distinguished from the physical arrangement of the conductors, devices, or device elements of a circuit system. 2. One -Line Diagram: A one -line diagram shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded. 3. Block Diagram: A block diagram is a diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines. 4. Wiring Diagram or Connection System: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram. November 2010 16000 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work 5. Interconnection Diagram: An interconnection diagram is a special form of wiring diagram that shows only the external connections between motor control centers, control panels and associated equipment, machinery, terminal boxes and external components. 6. Arrangement, Layout or Outline Diagrams: An arrangement, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. References 1. Division 16 contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this division as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. a) ANSI A58.1 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures b) NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC) c) NFPA 820 — Standard For Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment And Collection Facilities d) UBC — Uniform Building Code e) UMC — Uniform Mechanical Code 2. All applicable state and local codes. B. Listing of Products: Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed by an independent testing laboratory for the purpose for which they are to be used. The independent testing laboratory shall be acceptable to the inspection authority having jurisdiction. Three such organizations are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). A certified label or stamp shall be affixed to each product upon delivery. C. Factory Tests: Where specified in the individual product specification section, factory tests shall be performed at the place of fabrication and performed on completion of manufacture or assembly. The costs of factory tests shall be included in the contract price. November 2010 16000 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work 1.04 RESPONSIBILITY A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for: 1. Complete system in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents. 2. Coordinating the details of facility and instrumentation process equipment and construction for all Specification Divisions, which affect the work, covered under Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 3. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown or specified, but which are required by good practice to provide complete functional systems. 4. Information shown on Instrumentation and Control Drawings indicate general field wiring for Process Instrumentation and Control Systems. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and verify actual field conditions and equipment information. 5. Assisting process instrumentation and controls systems Integrator with operational readiness test (ORT- 1 & 2) per Section 13400. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals and product data shall be provided for all electrical equipment and materials in accordance with Section 01300. Where applicable, submittals shall be identified by the specified equipment number and specification section. B. Copy of Specification: Each submittal shall be accompanied with a copy of the pertinent specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check - marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (3) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated and, therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. The submittal shall be accompanied by a detailed, written justification for each deviation. Failure to include a copy of the marked -up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. November 2010 16000 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work C. Substitutions: If the CONTRACTOR elects to provide or use an equal to the named material or equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall make written application in accordance with paragraph 00700 -6.05. Where single source products are specified, they shall be provided in accordance with paragraph 00700 -6.05. D. Contractor Drawings: Where the CONTRACTOR provides drawings as part of the specified work, such drawings shall be prepared on ANSI size B, or D media (multiples of 11 by 17 inches). Wherever possible, drawings shall be produced using computer -aided drafting (CAD) software. Before project completion, provide the OWNER with a copy of the electronic drawing files in AutoCAD 2007 format on CD disks. Drawings shall be complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying the project name, the equipment, and the scope of the drawing. E. Wiring Diagrams 1. Refer to Section 13400. The Integrator will maintain the master set of the as -built wiring diagrams and will provide detailed analog loop diagrams, elementary/interconnection wiring diagrams, and control panel power distribution diagrams for the process instrumentation control system. The wiring diagrams will not include field routing information of wires, cables, trays, pullboxes, or other similar items. The field routing information is included elsewhere in Division 16, ELECTRICAL and is the responsibility of the Division 16, ELECTRICAL. 1.06 PROJECT /SITE CONDITIONS A. Wet and Corrosive Areas: All areas except Aeration Electrical Room shall be considered a Wet and Corrosive areas shall utilize only those materials which have demonstrated longevity in the environment encountered without degradation. All conduits and fittings shall be PVC- coated rigid galvanized steel (PVC -RGS); all boxes, supports, and mounting hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. B. Indoor and Dry Areas: Aeration Electrical Room shall be considered an Indoor /Dry area. All conduits and fittings shall be rigid galvanized steel (RGS); supports shall be galvanized steel; boxes shall be NEMA 12 painted steel; and mounting hardware shall be type 316 stainless steel. C. Seismic: Electrical equipment and supports shall be braced in accordance with UBC for Seismic Zone 3. 1.07 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE A. Materials and equipment shall be shipped and stored as specified in Section 01605. November 2010 16000 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work B. Equipment and materials to be located indoor shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. General: Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the work. Standard production materials shall be used wherever possible. B. Equipment Finish: Unless otherwise specified, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted inside and outside by the manufacturer as per their factory standard. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction 1. The work under Division 16 shall be performed in accordance with these specifications. 2. Unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with the work. Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the OWNER. B. Housekeeping 1. Electrical equipment shall be protected from dust, water, and damage. Motor control centers, switchgear, and buses shall be kept dry, wiped free of dust and dirt on the outside, and vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of acceptance of the work. 2. Before final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in Section 09900. 3. Electrical equipment temporarily exposed to weather, debris, liquids, or damage during construction shall be protected. November 2010 16000 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work 3.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record documents refer to all contract document drawings, schedules, lists, and electronic computer files maintained and annotated by the CONTRACTOR during construction. As a minimum, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the following record documents after final acceptance testing: 1. Red -Lined copy of Record Drawings, prior to drafting the changes, for review and approval by Engineer. 2. Final Record Drawings, with review comments incorporated, in accordance with Section 01720. 3. Original Submittal Drawings, paragraph 16000, 1.05. 4. Wiring Diagrams, paragraph 16000, 1.05. 5. CD with electronic files (CAD drawings, schedules, databases, spreadsheets, etc.) END OF SECTION November 2010 16000 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 General Requirements for Electrical Work SECTION 16040 IDENTIFICATION PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section specifies identification of electrical and control equipment and materials, including nameplates, labels, wire markers, raceway marking, and circuit directories. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Electrical equipment and materials shall be clearly identified for easy location and reference. Nameplates shall identify all panels, major components within panels, each item of distribution equipment, each overcurrent device within distribution equipment, equipment, equipment control stations, instruments, and instrument safety switches. Where required by specifications, code, or inspecting jurisdictions warning nameplates shall be provided. Circuit directories shall identify branch circuits of all panelboards. Pull and junction boxes shall be identified with the system function and circuit number(s) contained. B. Conduits, wires and cables shall be clearly labeled as specified herein. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided as a submittal in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Layout and exact spelling of nameplates and legend plates. For MCCs, PLC, control panels, disconnect switches, motors and pumps, this may be included with the equipment submittal. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. Provide identifying nameplates on all new and reused panels. Enclosure identification located on the enclosure surface: MCC buckets, PLC control panels, disconnect switches, terminal junction boxes, local control stations, instrument transmitters, analytical controllers, etc; 1. MCC sections, PLC control panels, disconnect switches, motors, and pumps: a. Panel Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face with rectangular screw on nameplates. November 2010 16040 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Identification b. Provide laminated phenolic plastic nameplates with white letters on black backgrounds. c. Fasten nameplates using self - tapping 316 stainless steel screws. d. Nameplate: Provide 2.25 -inch high plate, 1 -inch high lettering with 1 /2 -inch high tag number. e. Nameplate text shall include: i) Descriptive Name: "Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump 1" ii) Descriptive Tag: "46P1801" f. For the same piece of equipment, nameplate shall be provided at various associated locations as the following examples: i) At 46MCC10001 Section 3B (Starter) Bucket SECONDARY CLARIFIER 7 RAS PUMP 1 46P1801 ii) At Safety Disconnect Switch SECONDARY CLARIFIER 7 RAS PUMP 1 46P1801 (Power Fed From 46MCC10001 — 3B) iii) At Pump Motor SECONDARY CLARIFIER 7 RAS PUMP 1 46P1801 2. Terminal junction boxes, local control station, instrument transmitters, analytical controllers: a. Enclosure Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face with rectangular nameplates. November 2010 16040 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Identification b. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. c. Nameplate: Provide 1 -inch high plate with 1/2 -inch high lettering. d. Nameplate text shall include: i) Descriptive Tag: "46FIT1801" or "46LCP1801" 3. Component Nameplates — Panel Face: Component identification located on panel face under or near component: a. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. b. Nameplate: Provide 1/2 -inch high plate with 3/16 -inch high lettering. 4. Component Nameplates — Back of Face: Component identification located on or near component inside of enclosure: a. Materials: Adhesive backed, laminated plastic. b. Nameplate: Provide 1/2 -inch high plate with 3/16 -inch high lettering. 2.02 INSTRUMENT MARKERS A. All field instrument devices such as pressure switch, flow switch, instrument elements /sensors /transducers, provided under this contract shall be identified using instrument markers, attached to the device. Instrument markers shall be constructed from 12 gage, 1 -inch high, stainless steel material. The length of the markers shall be sized to accommodate the entire device tag on a single line with a minimum size of 1 -inch high by 2- inches long. The lettering shall be stamped, 3/4 -inch high as indicated on the drawings. Identification tags shall be neatly attached to the field instruments with 316 stainless steel attachment wire. 2.03 CONDUIT / RACEWAY MARKERS A. All conduits and raceways provided under this contract shall be identified using raceway identification markers. Markers shall be attached to each conduit whenever entering and /or exiting all pull boxes, terminal pull boxes, junction boxes, electrical power panels, control panels, motor control centers, and when penetrated thru divided walls, and floors. Raceway identification markers shall be constructed from 18 gage, 1 -inch high, stainless steel material. The length of the markers shall be sized to accommodate the entire raceway tag on a single line with a minimum size of 1 -inch high by 2- inches long. The lettering shall be stamped, 3/8 -inch high as indicated on the raceway schedule or on the drawings. Identification tags shall be neatly attached to conduits and raceways with 316 stainless steel attachment wire. November 2010 16040 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Identification 2.04 CABLE AND WIRE MARKERS A. Wire markers shall be a self - laminating system that provides permanent, flame - retardant identification of power, control and instrumentation conductors and cables. Background shall be white. Letters and numbers shall be 1/8 inch high, machine printed with permanent, water and smudge proof black ink. Identification shall be protected from chemicals and abrasion by a clear over -wrap or clear tubing of heat - shrinkable polyester or polyolefin. Wrap or sleeve shall be shrunk with hot air to bond tightly around the conductor or cable when complete. System shall comply with MIL -1- 23053/5, NASA MSFC276A, and UL -224 specifications. Wire marker system shall be Brady "DATAB ", Raychem "ShrinkMark/TMS Sleeves ", Thomas & Betts "E -Z- Code ", 3M Electrical Products "ScotchCode SCS ", or equal. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA A. The following information shall be provided as product data in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for all materials specified in this section. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT A. At all motor control centers, and distribution panelboards, install nameplates adjacent to each main and feeder protective device and MCC unit indicating the function or the load name and equipment number served. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. Install nameplates on all equipment including disconnect switches, instruments, transmitters, and controllers. Nameplates shall indicate the equipment number, the number of the distribution assembly providing power, and the circuit number. 3.03 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Label all pull boxes and junction boxes for fire alarm, telephone, security, surveillance, and communications systems with stencil painted letters to identify system. Where boxes are recessed in finished areas, mount label on inside of cover. 3.04 PULL WIRES A. Label each end of pull wires or lines left in empty conduits with tags or tape indicating location of other end of wire. November 2010 16040 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Identification 3. 05 EXISTING EQUIPMENT A. For new circuits, provide new labels or nameplates for motor control center and panelboard circuits in accordance with descriptions specified. B. Where feeder and circuiting changes are made in existing distribution equipment, motor control centers, and branch circuit's panelboards provide new, accurate circuit directories. END OF SECTION November 2010 16040 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Identification (PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL I9 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies raceways for electrical conductors including fittings and supports. Raceways shall be provided for power, control, instrumentation, grounding, lighting, receptacles, and signaling systems. Raceways consist of conduits, and tray systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1. NEMA VE1 — Cable Tray Systems 2. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code 3. NFPA 79 — Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery 4. UL 1 — Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit 5. UL 6 — Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit 6. UL 360 — Liquid Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit 7. UL 1660 — Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for all materials. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY A. General: General requirements for raceway applications and materials specified in this section are listed in the Raceway Specification Sheets in paragraph 16110- 3.03. November 2010 16110 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways B. Unscheduled Raceway 1. With the exception of lighting, communication, paging, security and receptacle circuits, the type and size of raceway shall be as specified on the drawings or schedules. Raceways, which are unscheduled, shall be sized by the CON'T'RACTOR in accordance with the NFPA 70, allowing at least 25 percent additional raceway capacity for future growth. Minimum size shall be as specified in the appropriate Raceway Specification Sheet. 2. The number and size of communication, paging, and security raceways shall be as required for the particular equipment provided subject to the minimum sizes specified above. The type of raceway shall be in accordance with the RACESPEC sheets, paragraph 16110 -3.03. C. Scheduled Raceway: The size and type of raceway shall be as specified on the drawings or schedules. 2.02 BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Terminal Cabinets: Terminal cabinets in all locations shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel with back panels. Cabinets shall be provided with hinged doors and moisture release. All mounting hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. Adjustable terminal strip mounting accessories shall be provided. Cabinets shall be provided with channel mounted terminal blocks rated 30 amperes, 600 volt AC. Terminals shall be No. 8 minimum strap -screw type, suitable for ring tongue or locking spade terminals. All interior mountings, such as cable tie holders and terminal strips shall be bolted in place. Adhesive mounting is not acceptable. 2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS A. Conduit Supports: Areas defined, as Indoor and Dry Areas in Section 16000, shall use hot -dip galvanized framing channel to support groups of conduit. Individual conduit supports shall be one -hole galvanized malleable iron pipe straps used with galvanized clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Areas defined as Wet and Corrosive Areas in Section 16000, shall use 316 stainless steel framing channel to support groups of conduit and 316 stainless steel clamps conduit wall hangers for individual conduits. B. Ceiling Hangers: Areas defined, as Indoor and Dry Areas in Section 16000, shall use adjustable galvanized carbon steel rod ceiling hangers. Straps or hangers of plumber's perforated tape are not acceptable. Unless otherwise specified, hanger rods shall be 1/2 -inch all- thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193. Areas defined as Wet and Corrosive Areas in Section 16000, shall use 316 stainless steel hangers. November 2010 16110 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be provided for all boxes per section 16040 IDENTIFICATION. 2.05 CONDUIT PENETRATION SEALS A. Wherever conduits penetrate outdoor concrete ceilings or any concrete walls below grade, provide watertight Epoxy seal. Seal shall be applied on both side of the penetration. 2.06 FIRESTOPS A. Firestops and seals shall be Flamemastic 77, Vimasco No. 1 -A, or- equal, and shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Products which are affected by water are not acceptable. 2.07 RACEWAY IDEN I'IF ICATION A. Raceways identification shall be provided per section 16040 IDENTIFICATION. 2.08 PULL CORDS A. Nylon pull cord with minimum strength of 500 pounds. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Raceway shown on the drawings shall be considered diagrammatic unless dimensioned. Match installation with existing raceways in the existing areas of the plant. 3.02 CONDUIT A. General 1. Conduit Routing: Wherever possible, conduit shall be mounted outside walls and structures. Embedded conduits shall be avoided wherever possible. No conduit shall approach closer than 6 inches to any object operating above 30 degrees C. November 2010 16110 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways 2. Conduit Runs Between Boxes: The CONTRACTOR shall limit the number of directional changes of the conduit to total not more than 270 degrees in any run between pull boxes. Conduit runs shall be limited to 400 feet, less 100 feet or fraction thereof, for every 90 degrees of change in direction. Bends and offsets shall be avoided where possible but, where necessary, shall be made without flattening or kinking, or shall be factory preformed bends. Turns shall be made with cast metal fittings or conduit bends. Welding, brazing or otherwise heating of conduit is not acceptable. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes: Where required for pulling cable and as necessary to meet the requirements of the previous paragraph, the CONTRACTOR shall provide junction or pull boxes. Pull boxes used for multiple conduit runs shall not combine circuits fed from different MCCs, switchboards, or switchgear. 4. Conduit Terminations: Conduit entering NEMA 1 type sheet steel boxes or cabinets shall be secured by locknuts on both the interior and exterior of the box or cabinet and shall have an insulating grounding or bonding bushing constructed over the conduit end. Conduit entering all other boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub. Cast boxes and nonmetallic enclosures shall have threaded hubs. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Metal parts of nonmetallic boxes and plastic coated boxes shall be bonded to the conduit system. Running threads shall not be used in lieu of conduit nipples, nor shall excessive thread be used on any conduit. The ends of conduit shall be cut square, reamed, and threaded with straight threads. a. Unless otherwise specified, conduit entering field equipment enclosures shall enter the bottom or side of the box. Where conduit comes from above, it shall be run down beside the enclosure and a tee condulet and drip leg installed. 5. Matching Existing Facilities: Where new conduit is used to replace existing conduit, the existing conduit and supports shall be removed, resulting blemishes shall be patched and repainted to match original conditions. Similarly, if existing conduits are to be reused and rerouted, resulting blemishes shall be corrected in the same manner. Coating system shall be in accordance with Section 09900. 6. Install pull cord in all spare and unused conduits. Provide marker at both end. B. Conduit Support 1. Exposed conduit shall be run on supports spaced not more than 10 feet apart and shall be constructed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes and ceiling. 2. Where three or more conduits are located in a parallel run, they shall be November 2010 16110 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways spaced out from the wall using framing channel. Where conduits are suspended from the ceiling, support systems shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 16110- 2.03.B. 3. Conduit rack and tray supports shall be secured to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast -in -place anchors. Individual conduit supports shall use cast -in -place anchors, die -cast, rustproof alloy or expansion shields. Wooden plugs, plastic inserts or gunpowder- driven inserts are not acceptable as a base to secure conduit supports. 4. All unistrut channels shall be provided with end caps. C. Conduit Penetrations 1. Unless otherwise specified, conduit routed perpendicular through floors, walls or other concrete structures shall pass through cast -in -place openings wherever possible. In cases where cast -in -place openings are not possible, appropriate size holes shall be bored through the concrete to accommodate the conduit passage. The size and location of the holes shall not impair the structure's integrity. Use X -ray device or similar equipment to locate reinforcement bars or concealed conduits in existing structure, prior to making holes. After completion, seal around conduit using epoxy, and finish to match existing surroundings. Unless otherwise protected, conduits that rise vertically through the floor shall be protected by a 3 1/2- inch high concrete pad with a sloping top. 2. Conduits entering manholes and handholes shall be horizontal. Conduits shall not enter through the concrete bottom of handholes and manholes. 3. Wherever conduits penetrate outdoor concrete walls or ceilings below grade, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a watertight seal. D. Conduit Separation: Signal conduits shall be separated from AC power or control conduits. The separation shall be a minimum of 12 inches for metallic conduits and 24 inches for nonmetallic conduits. E. Raceway Seals 1. For Hazardous or Corrosive Areas: Each raceway passing from a hazardous or corrosive area into a non hazardous or non corrosive area shall be provided with a sealing fitting which may be located on either side of the boundary. The seal shall be located at the boundary in accordance with NFPA 70. a. Seal fittings for conduit systems in hazardous atmosphere locations shall be hot -dip galvanized cast ferrous alloy. Sealing compound shall be hard type, Chico A, or- equal, UL listed for explosion proof sealing fittings. Sealing compound shall be non - hardening type for corrosive areas. November 2010 16110 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways 2. All Other Raceways: Both ends of all raceways shall be sealed against moisture, rodents, and bugs after raceways are cleaned and conductors pulled. Spare or unused raceways shall also be sealed. Sealants shall be identified for use with the cable insulation, shield, or other components. F. Mandrelling 1. A mandrell and a stiff - bristle brush, correctly sized for each size of conduit, shall be pulled through the raceway prior to installing wires or pull cords. Mandrelling shall be done in presence of the Engineer. 3.03 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS A. Raceway Specification Sheets begin on the next page. November 2010 16110 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways • • • • Raceway • Identification: GRS • • Description: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6 • • Finish: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside with protective chromated layer. Smooth finished surfaces. • • Manufacturers: Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., Wheatland Tube Co., or- • equal. Minimum size: Unless otherwise specified, 3/4 inch. Fittings: Compliance: UL 514B Hubs: Insulated throat with bonding locknut, hot -dip galvanized. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and shall provide a watertight connection. O -Z Gedney, CHM -XXT, or -equal Unions: Electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type Appleton UNF or UNY, Crouse -Hinds UNF or UNY, or- equal. Threadless fittings are not acceptable. Device Boxes: Indoor: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, All device boxes and junction boxes less than 6 inches square shall be Type FD cast ferrous. All boxes in non- process areas 6 inches square and larger shall be NEMA 12 welded steel with door hinges and clamp locks. All boxes in process areas shall be NEMA 4 watertight. Conduit bodies: ferrous alloy type with screw taps for fastening covers. Gaskets shall be made of neoprene. Outdoor: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, all device boxes and junction boxes less than 6 inches square shall be Type FD PVC - coated cast ferrous. All boxes 6 inches square and larger shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. Corrosive: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. November 2010 16110 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways 0 0 0 Raceway Identification: GRS (continued) Hazardous: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous. Elbows: 0 (3/4" thru 1 -1/2 ") Factory fabricated or field bent. 0 (2" thru 6 ") Factory fabricated only. Conduit Bodies: O (3/4" thru 4 ") Malleable iron, Form 8, hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise noted. Neoprene gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances. O (5" and 6 ") Electrogalvanized iron or cast iron box. O 0 Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight and shall be provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4 -inch movement in any direction. Manufacturers: Appleton, Crouse - Hinds, Hubbell, 0. Z. Gedney, or- equal. Installation: Rigid steel conduit shall be made up tight and without thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions. Steel conduit shall be supported away from the structures using hot -dip galvanized malleable iron straps with nesting backs. Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with a grounding bushing. Grounding bushing shall be connected to grounding system using conductors sized in accordance with NEC. Exposed male threads on rigid steel conduit shall be coated with zinc -rich paint. November 2010 16110 -8 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Raceways • • Raceway Identification: PVC -GRS • • Description: PVC - Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit • Compliance: ANSI C80.1, UL 6, NEMA RN 1 • • Finish: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, inside and outside. • Smooth finished surfaces. PVC Coating bonded to metal, 40 -mil nominal thickness. • Minimum size: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise specified. • Fittings: • Compliance: UL 514B • • Hubs: Insulated throat with bonding locknut, PVC - coated, hot -dip • galvanized with overlapping pressure- sealing sleeves. The hubs shall utilize a neoprene "0" ring and shall provide a • watertight connection. Thomas & Betts -Ocal STGXX -G, or- equal. Unions: PVC - coated electrogalvanized ferrous alloy type with overlapping pressure- sealing sleeves Thomas & Betts -Ocal UNF- X)0(-G, or- equal. Threadless fittings are not accept- able. Device Boxes: Indoor & Outdoor: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, all device boxes and junction boxes less than 6 -inch by 4 -inch shall be Type FD PVC - coated cast ferrous. Thomas & Betts -Ocal FDXXX -G, or- equal. All 6 -inch by 4 -inch and larger shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. Corrosive: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel. Hazardous: NEMA Type 7CD cast ferrous PVC- coated. Elbows: (3/4" thru 1 -1/2 ") Factory fabricated only. PVC - coated, hot -dip galvanized. (2" thru 6 ") Factory fabricated only. PVC - coated, hot -dip galvanized. November 2010 16110 -9 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways 0 0 Raceway Identification: PVC -GRS (continued) 0 Conduit Bodies: (3/4" thru 4 ") Malleable iron, Form 8, hot -dip galvanized PVC - coated, 0 unless otherwise noted. Neoprene gaskets for all access plates. Tapered threads for all conduit entrances. Thomas & Betts -Ocal, or- equal. Expansion Fittings: Expansion fittings in embedded runs shall be watertight and shall be provided with an internal bonding jumper. The expansion material shall be neoprene and shall allow for 3/4 -inch movement in any direction. 0 Coupling: Hot dipped galvanized steel coupling, smooth finish inside, PVC coated exterior with overlapping pressure sealing • sleeves. Thomas & Betts -Ocal CPL -X -G, or- equal. Installation: Conduit shall be made up tight and without thread compound. Joints shall be made with standard couplings or threaded unions with overlapping pressure - sealing sleeves. Conduit shall be supported away from the structures using 316 stainless steel hardware. Conduit entering boxes shall be terminated with a threaded hub with overlapping pressure sealing sleeves and a grounding bushing. Grounding bushing shall be connected to grounding system using conductors sized in accordance with NEC. Exposed male threads on conduit shall be covered with overlapping pressure - sealing sleeves. 0 November 2010 16110 -10 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Raceways Raceway Identification: LFS Description: Liquid tight Flexible Steel Conduit Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or adjustment. Compliance: UL 360 listed for 105 degree C insulated conductors. Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked and jacketed with a liquid tight, extruded PVC cover. Minimum size: 3 /4 -inch, unless shown otherwise, or specific instrument requires 1 A-inch conduit termination. Fittings: PVC coated liquid -tight fittings with 40 mils exterior PVC coating, and 2 mils interior urethane coating. UL Listed and sunlight UV resistant. Forty -five and 90- degree fittings shall be used where applicable. Installation: The length of flexible liquid tight conduit shall not exceed 18 inches or 15 times the trade diameter of the conduit, whichever is longer. The length of liquid tight conduit shall not exceed 36 inches. END OF SECTION November 2010 16110 -11 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517-03-09-24 Raceways (THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALL 1 0 0 SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This section specifies wires and cables rated at 600 -V used for power, lighting, receptacle, instrumentation, and control circuits. 1.02 REFERENCES A. This section references the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and of those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. 1. ASTM B3 — Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2. ASTM B8 — Concentric - Lay- Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard or Soft 3. ASTM B33 — Tinned soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes 4. UL 1072 — Distribution of Electrical Energy 1.03 LISTING AND LABELING A. Wires and cables shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which it is used by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide the following submittals prior to construction: 1. Manufacturer's product data on cables and splicing materials. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Wire and cables shall be identified on the outer covering with manufacturer's name, cable size, number of conductors, type of insulation, type of jacket, cable type, and voltage rating. Identifying information shall be printed every 3 feet in a color contrasting with the cable jacket. Refer to the drawings for cable size. November 2010 16120 -1 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable 2.02 600 - VOLT WIRE /CABLE A. Building Wire 1. All conductors shall be stranded copper. The minimum size for power conductor shall be 12 AWG. All control wire shall be stranded size 14 AWG minimum. All conductors shall have Type XHHW or XHHW -2 insulation. B. 600V Muticonductor Cable, Tray Rated 1. 600 V, multiconductor power cable shall be three or four single conductors cabled together, with ground wires and fillers in the interstices, to produce a round cross section with a binder tape and overall polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket. Complete assembly shall be UL listed Type TC, 90 degrees C for dry locations and 75 degrees C for wet locations, suitable for exposure to sunlight and weather, and shall meet the requirements of NEC (latest revision). 2. Individual conductors shall be stranded soft copper with thermoplastic insulation in accordance with all ICEA standards; type XHHW for all wiring 4/0 AWG and above. All wiring shall be UL listed per UL 44. Individual conductors shall be color coded black with numbers for phase identification. The color coding shall be per ICEA S -58 -679, Method 3, Table 2 for Conductors up to 10 AWG and Method 4 for conductors 8 AWG and larger. D. Identification (Color Coding) 1. All 600 -V wiring used in power circuits shall be color coded in accordance with the following table. Wire size 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory colored; wire size 4 AWG and larger may be black with colored self - adhesive vinyl tape applied at all splices and terminations. Where this method is used, wrap at least six (6) full turns of tape around the conductor covering an area 1 -1/2 to 2 inches wide. Vinyl tape shall be 3M Company No. 35 or- equal. Use Cable Color Three - Phase, 480 -V power Phase A Brown or Phase B Orange 480Y/277 -V lighting Phase C Yellow Ground Green Neutral Gray Single- Phase, 3 -wire Phase A Black 120/240 -V power Phase B Red 0 0 November 2010 16120 -2 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable Ground Green Neutral White Single- Phase, 120 -V power Phase A Black Ground Green Neutral White 2. The wires carrying a foreign voltage within a panel shall have a pink colored insulation. E. Sources: The Okonite Company, Rome Cable, Southwire, or- equal. 2.03 CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION WIRING A. Individual Conductors (TSP or TST): Cable shall consist of one pair or triad, size 18 AWG conductors with 15 mils of 90 degree C, polyvinylchloride (PVC) insulation, 600 volt rated, twisted on a 2 -inch lay and covered with a 100 percent 0.35 x 0.5 mil aluminum -Mylar tape shield with size 18 AWG 7- strand tinned copper drain wire and a PVC jacket overall. The cable shall be listed as Type TC cable. Cable shall be Okonite Okoseal -N type P -OS, Belden, or- equal. B. Multiple Conductors (TSP or TST): Cable shall consist of no. 18 AWG conductors, with each pair or triad shielded with aluminum /synthetic polymer backed tape and drain wire. Cable shall have polyvinylchloride (PVC) insulation of 15 mils of 90 degree C, 600 volt rated, and an overall shield assembled with 1 '/2 - 2 '/2 inch lay and covered with 100 percent 2.35 mil aluminum /synthetic polymer backed tape with a 7- strand tinned copper drain wire, and a PVC jacket overall. The cable shall be listed as Type TC cable. Cable shall be Okonite Okoseal -N type SP -OS, Belden or- equal. C. Multiple Control Conductors: The cable shall consist of size 14 AWG conductors with chemically cross - linked (vulcanized) polyethylene with high dielectric strength. Individual conductor shall have color coded for identification as per ICEA Method 1, K -2. The overall jacket shall be of PVC insulation. The cable shall be rated for cable tray use, 75 degree C in wet location, sunlight resistant, and have passed 70,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test. The cable shall be UL listed as Type TC cable. The cable shall be Okonite make X- Olene - Okoseal, or- equal. November 2010 16120 -3 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable 2.04 SPLICING AND 'TERMINATION MATERIALS A. 600 V Wire and Cable Connectors 1. Connectors for wire and cable shall be compression type and UL listed for the application. Connectors shall be tin - plated high conductivity copper. Connectors for wire sizes No. 10 AWG through No. 2/0 AWG shall be t- hole lugs; for size No. 4/0 and larger they shall be 2 -hole lugs. Wires of size up to and including 12 AWG shall be terminated directly in a compression type terminal block. Connectors at motors shall be to NSI screw and compression connectors. B. Wire Markers 1. Each power and control circuit conductor shall be identified as specified in Section 16040, Identification. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Raceway construction shall be complete and protected from the weather before cable is placed. Wire and cable shall not be pulled into conduits until conduits have been cleaned. B. Pulling wire and cable into conduit shall be completed without damaging or putting undue stress on the cable insulation. Soapstone, talc or UL listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable. C. Whenever a cable leaves a raceway, a cable support shall be provided. D. When flat bar connections are made with unplated bar, the CONTRACTOR shall scratch -brush and lubricate the contact areas with joint compound, Atlantic No. 62, Alcoa No. 2EJC, or- equal. Bolts and other hardware shall be lubricated with the same contact aid. Bolts shall be torqued to the bus manufacturer's recommendations. Joint compound shall not contain grit or metallic particles. E. Incoming cables in panels and motor control centers, size 6 AWG and smaller, shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches and neatly spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. The wire conductor ends shall be cut off flush with proper tool to ensure that no sharp edges protrude. Sufficient slack shall be allowed in cables for alterations in terminal connections. Lacing shall be done with Nylon cable ties (Thomas & Betts TY -RAP or- equal) using a tensioning tool designed for that purpose. November 2010 16120 -4 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable F. Cables crossing hinges shall be made up into groups not exceeding 12 and shall be so arranged that they will be protected from chafing when the hinged member is moved. These groups shall be protected by spiral wrap and having a minimum 12 -inch loop. G. Splices are not permitted in power, instrumentation, or control wiring. All wiring shall be continuous from point -to- point. 3.02 WIRE AND CABLE TERMINATION A. Power conductors size 10 AWG and larger shall be terminated using 1 -hole or two -hole lugs. Insulated terminals shall be used also on all stranded instrumentation wiring. Special instrumentation cables shall be terminated in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the equipment and subject to acceptance of the OWNER. B. Terminals and connectors shall be installed with the compression tool recommended by the terminal manufacturer. C. All field wiring to pushbutton stations and other isolated control devices shall be labeled at each end with the complete circuit number. All wiring to other panels relay compartments of the same panel or interlocking wiring shall have the applicable identification at each end of the conductors. 3.03 WIRE AND CABLES (600 -VOLT) A. Inspect all wires and cables for damage prior to installation. Damaged cable shall not be installed. B. In all metallic and non - metallic conduits where conductors are installed, a separate ground wire shall be provided, sized in accordance with the latest edition of National Electrical Code, and installed in accordance with these specifications. C. Manholes, handholes, conduits and ductbanks shall be thoroughly dewatered and shall be kept dry until any allowable cable splicing has been performed. D. Conductors in panels and electrical equipment, size 6 AWG and smaller, shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing is not necessary in plastic panel wiring duct. E. Slack shall be provided in junction boxes, handholds and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls of the box. November 2010 16120 -5 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable • F. Stranded conductors shall be terminated as described in Paragraph 3.02 except where terminals will not accept such terminations. In these cases, the conductors shall be terminated directly on the terminal block. G. Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by the NEC and the following: 1. Conductors operating at different voltages shall be in separate raceways as follows: a. 120 -V to 600 -V power and control conductors. b. Below 100 V signal conductors. c. Direct current, 125 V and below, power conductors. 2. Power conductors from different panels /switchboards serving similar pieces of equipment with the same function shall be in separate raceways. 3. Conductors whose size differs by more than 3 number classes shall not be in the same conduit. 4. Lighting and 120 -V receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with the derating requirements of NEC. 5. Instrumentation circuit shall not be run in the same conduit or tray with power, lighting, control, and receptacle circuits. H. Conductors in lighting and receptacle circuits shall be terminated using screw connectors. I. Cables and wires installed in cable tray shall comply with NEC requirements for fill, separation, and bending radius requirements. 3.04 TESTING A. Conducted tests after the wires and cables are installed and prior to energizing. B. Perform all tests to meet or exceed the standards established by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). C. An independent subcontractor may be retained to perform some or all of the required tests. Such a CONTRACTOR shall be a member of NETA, or approved by the OWNER D. OWNER will witness each test. Notify the OWNER three working days prior to each test. E. Copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the OWNER within forty-eight hours of completion of each test. F. Furnish all necessary test instruments, equipment and supplies for completion of all tests. November 2010 16120 -6 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable G. Conductors Under 600 Volts 1. Perform insulation resistance testing of all power circuits 480- 600 volts with a 1000 -volt megger, applied for 1 minute. 2. Measure the insulation resistance of each circuit phase -to -phase and phase -to ground. 3. Minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 10 megohm or as accepted by the OWNER. 4. Disconnect equipment and instruments that might be damaged by this test. Perform tests with all other equipment connected to the circuits. November 2010 16120 -7 Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable A. WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM Wire or Cable No. Date of test Ambient temperature ° F Insulation Resistance Location of Test (megohms) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. CERTIFIED Signature of CONTRACTOR's Representative Date WITNESSED Signature of OWNER's Representative Date END OF SECTION November 2010 16120 - Durham AB 4 Miscellaneous Improvements 517- 03 -09 -24 Wire and Cable